Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0 Feature Reference
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lucent Technologies Manuals
  4. Conference System
  5. MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0
  6. Feature reference

Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0 Feature Reference

Hide thumbs Also See for MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0:
1
2
3
4
Table Of Contents
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System
Release 7.0
Feature Reference
®
555-670-110
Comcode 108370263
Issue 1
April 1999

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0

  • Page 1 ® MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 Comcode 108370263 Issue 1 April 1999...

  • Page 2: April 1999

    Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it. Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use.

  • Page 3: Ordering Information

    Support Telephone Number In the continental US, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer helpline 24 hours a day. Call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at 1-800-628-2888 or your Lucent Technologies authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system. Outside the continental US, contact your local Lucent Technologies authorized representative.

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Contents Contents Contents New Features and Enhancements xiii Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) xiii Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements xvii Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) xvii Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997)

  • Page 6: Contents

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Contents Index of Features by Activity Abbreviated Ring Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Alarm Alarm Clock Allowed/Disallowed Lists Authorization Code Auto Answer All Auto Answer Intercom Auto Dial Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference...
  • Page 7 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Contents Forced Account Code Entry Forward and Follow Me Group Calling Headset Options Hold HotLine Idle Line Preference Inside Dial Tone Inspect Labeling Language Choice Last Number Dial Line Request Messaging Microphone Disable...
  • Page 8 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Contents viii Saved Number Dial Second Dial Tone Timer Service Observing Signal/Notify Speed Dial Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) System Access/Intercom Buttons System Renumbering Timed Flash Tandem Switching Timer Toll Type Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling...
  • Page 9 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Contents Features and Planning Forms System Features General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Telephone and Operator Features Telephone Programming D-28 System Programming Menu Hierarchy Sample Reports System Information Report Dial Plan Report...
  • Page 10 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Contents Authorization Code Information Report F-42 BRI Information Report F-43 Switch 56 Data Information Report F-44 Button Diagrams Programming Special Characters Single-Line Telephones Analog Multiline Telephones MLX-10 and MLX-5 Non-display Telephones MLX Display Telephones ETR and MLS Non-display...

  • Page 11: Important Safety Instructions

    Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Use only Lucent Technologies-manufactured MERLIN LEGEND Communications System circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit.

  • Page 12: Save These Instructions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.

  • Page 13: New Features And Enhancements

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) xiii New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) Release 7.0 includes all Release 6.1 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 14 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) programmed to support either T/R or ETR, but not both simultaneously. This module does not have a separate PFT port. In the event of a power failure, port 12 becomes the PFT port for line 1.
  • Page 15 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) Priority Call Queuing Priority call queuing provides the ability to: Place some callers ahead of others who are waiting for the same agent group.
  • Page 16 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) MLX Headset Operation Headset operation in Release 7.0 has been enhanced so that MLX headset operation more closely mimics the handset operation in the following ways: When a person is on a call using a headset and the headset auto-answer is turned on, the user hears a short ring when another call is coming in.

  • Page 17: Prior Releases: Features And Enhancements

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) xvii Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) Release 6.1 includes all Release 6.0 functionality plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 18 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) xviii Centralized Voice Messaging One or more MERLIN LEGEND Systems (Release 6.1 or later) can share the voice messaging system (VMS) of another MERLIN LEGEND System, provided the systems are directly connected to the system with the VMS.
  • Page 19 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) Group Coverage. Group Coverage can be provided across a private network to a VMS, a non-local calling group, a QCC queue, a DLC, or any individual extension on the remote system.
  • Page 20 PRI Switch Type Test A new maintenance test, the PRI Switch Type Test, has been created to allow Lucent Technologies technicians or authorized dealers to automatically determine if each end of the PRI tandem trunks has been programmed correctly. The test ®...

  • Page 21: Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) appear on WinSPM. Supported in Windows 95 Windows NT, and Windows 98, WinSPM is also backwards-compatible with previous DOS versions of SPM and is available on CD-ROM.
  • Page 22 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) xxii addition, system managers can control whether calling name, calling number, or both are shown at MLX display telephones for incoming calls across PRI tandem trunks.
  • Page 23 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) xxiii Voice Mail and Auto Attendant. Networked systems (prior to Release 6.1) should have their own local voice mail and/or auto attendant applications as well as their own external alerts and Music-On-Hold sources.
  • Page 24 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) xxiv Prompt-Based Overflow System managers can activate the Prompt-Based Overflow option. This option allows callers waiting in queue and listening to a delay announcement to press the # key in order to reach the overflow receiver for the group, which may be the QCC queue or another calling group (including a calling group assigned for a voice mail system).

  • Page 25: Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to a LAN server running Novell ® NetWare software allows Lucent Technologies-certified telephony applications to control and monitor MLX and analog multiline telephone (BIS only) operations. The physical connection for the CTI link is an MLX port on a 008 MLX or 408 MLX module on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit and an ISDN link interface card plugged into the customer’s server.
  • Page 26 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) xxvi NOTES: The NetWare server software version must be 3.12, 4.1, or 4.11. The 008 MLX and 408 MLX modules must have a firmware vintage other than 29.
  • Page 27 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) xxvii NOTE: In the case of remote access calls, the only information that the application can collect about the caller is the remote telephone number.
  • Page 28 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) xxviii Any type of inside or outside line that is normally available to a single-line telephone can be assigned to a HotLine extension. Generally, the HotLine telephone does not receive calls, and its lines should be set to No Ring.
  • Page 29 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) xxix The primary and secondary announcement options, when used together, allow an initial message to play for callers, followed by a repeating announcement that, for example, urges callers to stay on the line and wait for a calling group member.

  • Page 30: Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) MLX-5 and MLX-5D Telephones The MLX-5 nondisplay and MLX-5D display telephones are compatible with all system releases. The display telephone includes a 2-line by 24-character display, and both telephones come with five line buttons.
  • Page 31 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxi — MCI 900 service numbers. LEC services for DMS-100 switch types: — DMS Virtual Private Network service for calls between the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and another communications system (such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System).
  • Page 32 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxii — The call is answered by someone not a member of an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group. An exclamation point (!) signals that an Auto Login or Auto Logout agent handled a call that was answered by someone who was not a member of that Auto Login or Auto Logout with Overflow group.

  • Page 33: Release 4.1 Enhancements (June 1997)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.1 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxiii Enhanced Extension Information Report Beginning with Release 4.2, the Extension Information Report includes the Extension Status and supervisory mode of each extension. Release 4.1 Enhancements (June 1997) Release 4.1 includes all Release 4.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed...
  • Page 34 Network-1 Basic Rate Interface) Provisioning Test Tool is enhanced to include testing for BRI facilities that are part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs). The NI-1 BRI Provisioning Test Tool is used by Lucent Technologies maintenance personnel on MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems that include an 800 NI-BRI module.

  • Page 35: Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996) xxxv Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996) Release 4.0 includes all Release 3.1 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 36 PCMCIA technology. Support for 2B Data Applications A Lucent Technologies-certified group and desktop video application can use two B-channels to make video/data calls when connected to a single MLX extension jack programmed for 2B data. The 2B data devices must be equipped with ISDN-BRI interfaces.
  • Page 37 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996) xxxvii Voice Announce on Queued Call Console The system manager can enable the fifth Call button on a QCC console (Hybrid/ PBX mode only) to announce a call on another user’s speakerphone (providing the destination telephone has a voice announce-capable SA button available).

  • Page 38: Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) xxxviii Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) Release 3.1 includes all Release 3.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 39 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) xxxix Disallowed List Including Numbers Often Associated with Toll Fraud A factory-set Disallowed List 7 contains default entries, which are numbers frequently associated with toll fraud.

  • Page 40: Release 3.0 Enhancements (August 1994)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.0 Enhancements (August 1994) New Maintenance Procedure for Testing Outgoing Trunks Technicians must enter a password in order to perform trunk tests. SECURITY ALERT: The enhancements in Release 3.1 help increase the security of the MERLIN LEGEND System.
  • Page 41 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.0 Enhancements (August 1994) — 2500YMGL and 2500 MMGL (single-line desk telephones, selectable positive disconnect). — Picasso™ Still-Image telephone (for interactive display of still images).
  • Page 42 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.0 Enhancements (August 1994) xlii User Features Security The Remote Access feature allows people at remote locations to enter the system by dialing the number of a line or trunk designated for remote access.
  • Page 43 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.0 Enhancements (August 1994) xliii Direct Voice Mail If your company has voice mail, this feature allows you to dial a co-worker’s voice mailbox directly without ringing that person’s extension.

  • Page 44: Release 2.1 Enhancements (August 1994)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.1 Enhancements (August 1994) xliv Fax Mail. Allows subscribers to send fax messages, get fax messages, record personal greetings, and program outcalling. Fax Broadcast.
  • Page 45 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.1 Enhancements (August 1994) An inside call on hold at an SA button can be picked up and transferred by any person with a Shared SA button corresponding to the button with the held call.
  • Page 46 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.1 Enhancements (August 1994) xlvi A new 012 (tip/ring) module [apparatus code 517G13 (28) or higher letter] contains a built-in ring generator. The maximum ring equivalency number (REN) supported is 2.2, and the module will ring four ports at one time.

  • Page 47: Release 2.0 Enhancements (October 1992) Xlvii

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.0 Enhancements (October 1992) xlvii A new digital Magic On Hold unit is available in three configurations: — Basic Prerecorded Package —...
  • Page 48 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.0 Enhancements (October 1992) xlviii Integrated Administration provides a single interface through Integrated Solution III (IS III) for programming entries common to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and AUDIX™...
  • Page 49 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.0 Enhancements (October 1992) xlix Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk emulation on a T1 facility provides up to 24 DID channels on a single DS1 interface, instead of requiring 24 separate physical trunks.

  • Page 50: Release 1.1 Enhancements (October 1992)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 1.1 Enhancements (October 1992) Maintenance Maintenance enhancements include the following: Clear descriptions of module test failures Optional printing of hard copy of error logs Display that correlates extension numbers with slot/port and logical ID Display showing which slots, trunks, and extensions are maintenance busy Internal digital switching element (DSE) loopback test for all modules...
  • Page 51 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 1.1 Enhancements (October 1992) Programming and Maintenance Programming and maintenance enhancements include the following: Additional Inspect capability in system programming. Editing capability (Backspace selection) in extension programming. Improvements to system reports.
  • Page 52 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 1.1 Enhancements (October 1992)

  • Page 53: About This Guide

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 About This Guide Intended Audience liii About This Guide The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is an advanced digital switching system that integrates voice and data communications features. Voice features include traditional telephone features, such as Transfer and Hold, and advanced features, such as Group Coverage, Direct Voice Mail, and Tandem Switching.
  • Page 54 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 About This Guide How to Use This Guide “At a Glance,” a boxed table at the beginning of each feature description, summarizes, as applicable, the following aspects of the feature or feature group: Users Affected.

  • Page 55: Terms And Conventions Used

    In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer Helpline 24 hours a day. Call the Helpline at 1-800-628-2888 (consultation charges may apply), or contact your Lucent Technologies representative if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.
  • Page 56 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 About This Guide Terms and Conventions Used Old Term New Term analog voice and analog voice and analog data station modem data workstation digital voice and MLX voice and analog data station modem data workstation analog data-only station...

  • Page 57: Security Lvii

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 About This Guide Security lvii Product Safety Advisories Throughout these documents, hazardous situations are indicated by an exclamation point inside a triangle and the word CAUTION or WARNING . WARNING: Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.

  • Page 58: Related Documents

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 About This Guide Related Documents lviii Related Documents The documents listed in the following table are part of the MERLIN LEGEND documentation set. Within the continental United States, contact the Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center by calling 1-800-457-1235.

  • Page 59: How To Comment On This Guide

    If the feedback form is missing, write directly to: Documentation Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road, Room 2W-330 Basking Ridge, NJ 07920...
  • Page 60 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 About This Guide How to Comment on This Guide...

  • Page 61: Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Overview Features Overview This guide provides both summary and detailed information about the features of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System. For each feature, the following types of information are provided, as applicable: At a Glance.

  • Page 62: Index Of Feature Names

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... 2B Data Digital Data Calls. See also Data/Video Reference Administration Programming See also System Programming Alarm Alarm Alarm Clock...
  • Page 63 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Automatic Route Selection (ARS) over Automatic Route Selection Private Networks and Tandem Switching See also Network Reference Autoqueuing Callback Remote Access...
  • Page 64 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Camp-On Camp-On -140 Cancel Delivered Message Messaging CAT (Call Accounting Terminal) Appendix I Centralized Telephone Programming Programming See also System Programming Centralized Voice Messaging Centralized Voice Messaging...
  • Page 65 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Digital Data Ports Digital Data Calls See also Data/Video Reference Dial-Plan Routing Table Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 See also Data/Video Reference Dial Tone Inside Dial Tone...
  • Page 66 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Extension Status Extension Status Group Calling Facility Alpha/Number for Incoming Calls Labeling Facility Restriction Levels (FRLs) Automatic Route Selection, Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) Features See also Network Reference Fax Extension...
  • Page 67 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Headset Status Headset Options Queued Call Console Hold Hold Hold Reminder Station Display Hold Return Queued Call Console Hotel mode Extension Status HotLine...
  • Page 68 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... ISDN Terminal Adapter Digital Data Calls Appendix I See also Data/Video Reference Labeling Labeling Last Number Dial Last Number Dial Last Number Redial Last Number Dial...
  • Page 69 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Modem Pooling See MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Modem Pooling, Application Note Multi-Function Module Multi-Function Module Music-On-Hold Music-On-Hold Mute Microphone Disable Mute, Headset/Handset...
  • Page 70 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Patterns Automatic Route Selection Personal Directory Directories Personal Speed Dial Speed Dial Personalized Ring Ringing Options Pickup Pickup Pickup, Call Waiting Call Waiting...
  • Page 71 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Restrictions Calling Restrictions Retrieve Message Messaging Return Call Messaging Return Ring Interval Queued Call Console Ring Buttons System Access/Intercom Buttons Ring Timing Options Ringing Options...
  • Page 72 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Programming See also System Programming Station Conference—External Parties Conference Station Conference—Total Parties Conference Station DSS Auto Dial Direct Station Selector Station Lines System Access/Intercom Buttons...
  • Page 73 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Feature Names Feature Name... See... Page #... Toll Type Toll Type Touch-Tone Receivers (TTRs) Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Touch-Tone Signaling Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Transfer Transfer Transfer Audible...

  • Page 74: Index Of Features By Activity

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Index of Features by Activity The tables in this section index system features according to the activities that people typically perform. Operator features are not covered exhaustively here because they are described in detail in the entries: ‘‘Direct-Line Console’’...
  • Page 75 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Basic Calling and Answering Features Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... Answering calls: And seeing who is calling you from Display Display another extension telephones...
  • Page 76 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Basic Calling and Answering Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... If you are an operator DLC and QCC Direct-Line Console operators only Queued Call Console...
  • Page 77 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Basic Calling and Answering Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... An outside call System Access/ Intercom Buttons Pools Personal Lines Centrex Operation An inside or outside number with one...
  • Page 78 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Basic Calling and Answering Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... A busy line to have your call placed when All except QCC Callback the line is available...
  • Page 79 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Basic Calling and Answering Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... Putting a call on hold: At your own extension, so that you can All except Hold pick it up...
  • Page 80 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Call Coverage Features Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... Covering calls: As an operator DLC and QCC Direct-Line Console operators only Queued Call Console Direct Station Selector...
  • Page 81 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Timekeeping Features Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... To set others’ telephones to ring at a DLC operators Reminder Service certain time as a reminder only To set your own telephone to ring at a Reminder Service...
  • Page 82 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Calling Privileges and Restrictions Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... On certain outside lines in a Hybrid/PBX System Automatic Route system manager only...
  • Page 83 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity Messaging — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... Cancel a message left for a co-worker Messaging who has a display telephone (Leave Message) Receiving messages: Read messages...
  • Page 84 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity System Manager Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... Set up which line is selected when a user All telephones Automatic Line lifts the handset or presses the Speaker Selection and...
  • Page 85 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity System Manager Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... Change the language (English, French, System Labeling or Spanish) used in System manager or Programming and Maintenance (SPM) programmer...
  • Page 86 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity System Manager Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... Set up a group of fax machines to take Group Calling calls Set up voice messaging system to take Group Calling...
  • Page 87 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity System Manager Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... Find out what to do when callers on hold Hold are being disconnected Make your system more secure from toll Calling Restrictions...
  • Page 88 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Index of Features by Activity System Manager Features — Continued Activity... For... Feature Name... Page #... Log a delay announcement device for a Operator Group Calling group in or out consoles Allow DLC operators to place calls on...

  • Page 89: Abbreviated Ring

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Abbreviated Ring Abbreviated Ring ‘‘Ringing Options’’ on page 618.

  • Page 90: Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry

    Enter extensions required to use account codes before making an outside call: Extensions Account Hardware Printer for SMDR Reports, or PC and printer equipped with Lucent Technologies CAS software needed for Account Code Reports Maximum 16 characters (0–9, *) Factory Setting...
  • Page 91 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry the tones generated by dialing the account code number. To cancel an account code (when permitted), activate the feature and exit without entering a code. Forced Account Code Entry, when activated for an extension, has the following effects: If you select an outside line on an SA button (by dialing a dial-out code) or...
  • Page 92 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Mode Differences Behind Switch Mode In Behind Switch mode, single-line telephones must be programmed through Idle Line Preference to select an SA or ICOM button when the user lifts the handset to make an outgoing call.
  • Page 93 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry If Account Code Entry is assigned to a button, the LED flashes when you lift the handset and attempt an outside call. On MLX display telephones, the feature name appears on the display.
  • Page 94 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Feature Interactions Authorization Code If you do not enter an account code, the ACCOUNT field of the SMDR printout contains the authorization code or the home extension used to obtain restriction privileges.
  • Page 95 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Display When you activate an Account Code Entry feature, the ACCT: message on the display prompts you to enter the account code. The account code digits appear next to the prompt as they are dialed.
  • Page 96 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Transfer When a call is transferred, the destination extension cannot change an account code entered at the originating extension. UDP Features In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), account codes entered on the local system are reported by SMDR.

  • Page 97: Alarm

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Alarm Alarm At a Glance Users Affected Operators Reports Affected Extension Information Mode Telephones System operator consoles only (QCC or DLC) Programming Code *759 MLX Display Label Alarm [Alarm] System Programming AuxEquip MaintAlarms...
  • Page 98 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Alarm Telephone Differences Alarm buttons can be programmed only on system operator consoles. Direct-Line Consoles The Alarm button is not a fixed feature and can be assigned to any available button on an analog or MLX DLC.
  • Page 99 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Alarm Night Service A line/trunk jack programmed as a maintenance alarm port cannot be assigned to a Night Service group. Personal Lines A line/trunk jack used for a maintenance alarm cannot be assigned as a personal line.

  • Page 100: Alarm Clock

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Alarm Clock Alarm Clock At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected None Modes Telephones MLX display and analog multiline telephones MLX Display Label AlarmClk [Alarm] Description If you have a display telephone, you can use it as an alarm clock and set it to beep...
  • Page 101 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Alarm Clock To set the alarm on an analog multiline telephone, follow the procedure below: Press the Set button. ALARM Off begins to flash. Press the Fwd button. ALARM On begins to flash. Press Set.

  • Page 102: Allowed/Disallowed Lists

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Allowed/Disallowed Lists At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Access to Allowed Lists, Access to Disallowed Lists, Allowed Lists, Disallowed Lists, Remote Access (DISA) Information Modes Telephones System Programming...
  • Page 103 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Description Used in conjunction with calling restrictions (outward and toll), an Allowed List identifies numbers that the caller is allowed to dial, despite restrictions. For example, an Allowed List assigned to an outward-restricted extension can allow calls to specific local numbers, such as 911 or toll numbers.
  • Page 104 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Star Codes and Allowed/Disallowed Lists In some instances, after you dial a star code (a star digit followed by a 2- or 3-digit number), the central office provides a second dial tone as a prompt to enter more digits.
  • Page 105 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Disallow *67 only when it is followed by *69. Default Disallowed Lists In Release 3.1 and later systems, the system is factory-set with a default Disallowed List (List 7), which includes the following entries: 0, 10, 11, 1809, 1700, 1900, 976, 1ppp976, * (p = any digit).
  • Page 106 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists The Pause character (entered by pressing the Hold button) can be used as a wild card character in Disallowed Lists—for example, to indicate that calls to a given exchange are restricted in every area code.
  • Page 107 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Directories If you have an outward- or toll-restricted extension, you cannot dial an outside number by using a Personal Directory or System Directory listing (excluding a marked System Directory listing), unless the number is on an Allowed List assigned to the extension.
  • Page 108 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Speed Dial Using a marked System Speed Dial number (the dialed number is suppressed from the display) to dial a number overrides the calling restrictions (such as toll or outward restrictions, or Allowed and Disallowed Lists) assigned to that extension.

  • Page 109: Authorization Code

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Authorization Code Authorization Code At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, data users Reports Affected Extension Information, Authorization Code Information, SMDR Modes Telephones All (touch-tone telephones except QCC) Programming Code Feature Code MLX Display Label...
  • Page 110 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Authorization Code using, not your home extension. For Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), the Authorization code feature allows you to use your home extension FRL when placing private network calls.
  • Page 111 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Authorization Code extension’s authorization code in one of the following ways: Press a programmed Authorization Code button, and then enter the assigned authorization code. Press the Feature button on an MLX display telephone, and then select Auth Code.
  • Page 112 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Authorization Code Deactivating an Authorization Code Each entry of an authorization code is good for only one telephone call. After completing a call, the current extension loses home extension privileges. It also loses privileges for subsequent calls after putting a call on hold or after initiating Recall, Headset Hang Up, or Park features.
  • Page 113 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Authorization Code Analog Multiline Telephones At an analog multiline telephone connected to a General Purpose Adapter set for Auto operation, you must lift the handset before activating Authorization Code. Do not use the Spkrphone button.
  • Page 114 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Authorization Code Centrex Operation In Release 6.0 and later Key or Hybrid/PBX mode systems, you can activate or deactivate forwarding features, including Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding but excluding Follow Me, at an extension on the system by entering the authorization code for the extension on the same system from which calls are to be forwarded.
  • Page 115 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Authorization Code Park Initiating Park after entering an authorization code deactivates the Authorization Code feature. You do not need to enter an authorization code to pick up a parked call. Remote Access You cannot enter an authorization code on a remote access call.

  • Page 116: Auto Answer All

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Answer All Auto Answer All At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones Analog multiline Programming Code *754 MLX Display Label AutoAns All (in centralized telephone programming)
  • Page 117 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Answer All Considerations and Constraints When Auto Answer All is used, all voice announcements (including Voice Announce) should be disabled because the device connected to the GPA cannot answer voice-announced calls.
  • Page 118 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Answer All Coverage A sender or receiver at an analog multiline telephone can use Auto Answer All to have calls answered by an answering machine connected to the telephone.

  • Page 119: Auto Answer Intercom

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Answer Intercom Auto Answer Intercom At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones Analog multiline Programming Code *753 MLX Display Label AutoAnsIcom (in centralized telephone programming) Hardware Hands-Free Unit (HFU) is used to answer inside calls.
  • Page 120 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Answer Intercom Mode Differences When you activate Auto Answer Intercom in Hybrid/PBX mode and you receive a call on an SA button, the HFU turns on, even if the button is programmed for Delay Ring or No Ring.
  • Page 121 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Answer Intercom UDP Features In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), Auto Answer Intercom and HFAI do not work for private network calls.

  • Page 122: Auto Dial

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Dial Auto Dial At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC and single-line telephones Programming Codes Inside *22 + ext.
  • Page 123 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Dial Considerations and Constraints When an Auto Dial button is used to make a call, the green LED next to the button does not turn on. Only company extension numbers should be programmed on inside Auto Dial buttons.
  • Page 124 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Dial In Release 2.1 and later systems, when a call is forwarded to a multiline telephone that has an inside Auto Dial button programmed for the forwarding telephone, the green LED next to the Auto Dial button does not flash.
  • Page 125 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Dial Other Multiline Telephones With all multiline telephones, you can program and use Auto Dial buttons. When using an MLX-20L telephone, use Personal Directory in place of Auto Dial. On an MLX display telephone, select the feature from the display to program it.
  • Page 126 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Dial Display When you press a programmed Auto Dial button, the digits show on the display as if you were dialing from the dialpad. The number is dialed automatically (special characters for dialing strings are described in Appendix H).
  • Page 127 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Dial Pools Pool dial-out codes cannot be programmed on inside Auto Dial buttons. A pool dial-out code can be programmed on an outside Auto Dial button when a telephone number is also included. Depending on the local telephone company, however, Pause characters may be required before the telephone number.
  • Page 128 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Auto Dial System Access/ When you press an inside Auto Dial button, the system automatically Intercom Buttons selects an SA or ICOM button and turns on the speakerphone. When you press an outside Auto Dial button, the system automatically selects an outside line button in Key mode, a prime line button in Behind Switch mode, or an SA button in Hybrid/PBX...

  • Page 129: Automatic Line Selection And Ringing/Idle Line Preference

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones...
  • Page 130 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Ringing/Idle Line Preference Ringing/Idle Line Preference is a single option that controls two aspects of an extension’s behavior: selection of a line when a call arrives and selection of a line when a user hangs up.
  • Page 131 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Up to eight line buttons (except on single-line telephones) can be programmed in the ALS sequence for an extension, either through centralized telephone programming or through extension programming, using programming codes only.
  • Page 132 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Considerations and Constraints Outside line buttons and SA or ICOM buttons can be included in the ALS sequence. Inside and outside lines, however, should not be interleaved. A typical sequence would consist of all desired SA or ICOM buttons, followed by all desired outside line buttons.
  • Page 133 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Behind Switch Mode The factory-set ALS sequence includes only the prime line. The sequence can be changed to an ICOM line followed by the prime line or outside lines. This allows a single-line telephone user to use system features and to select the prime line and/ or outside lines by dialing the Idle Line Access code (usually 9).
  • Page 134 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Feature Interactions Account Code Entry With a single-line telephone, you can enter account codes only when ALS is programmed to select an SA or ICOM button when you lift the handset. Coverage When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is on for an extension, the system automatically selects a Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, or Group Cover...

  • Page 135: Automatic Maintenance Busy

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Maintenance Busy Automatic Maintenance Busy At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected System Information (SysSet-up) Mode Hybrid/PBX System Programming System MaintenBusy Description When Automatic Maintenance Busy is enabled, a malfunctioning loop-start, ground-start, or tie line/trunk is automatically put in a maintenance-busy state,...
  • Page 136 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Maintenance Busy Considerations and Constraints Incoming calls are received and processed normally on lines/trunks that are in a maintenance-busy state. DID trunks (Hybrid/PBX mode only) are not affected by Automatic Maintenance Busy because these trunks can only receive calls and are not pooled.

  • Page 137: Automatic Route Selection

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Automatic Route Selection At A Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected ARS, Extension Directory, Extension Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information Mode Hybrid/PBX only Telephones...
  • Page 138 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Specify whether a route is to be used for voice, data, or both on a T1, BRI, or PRI call: More Tables Sub A Data/Sub B Data Tables Sub A Pools/Sub B Pool Assign or remove the FRL associated with each route:...
  • Page 139 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Description ARS is available only in Hybrid/PBX mode. ARS allows outgoing calls to be dynamically routed over selected facilities after dialing an ARS access code (usually 9).
  • Page 140 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection A route contains the following types of information. — Pool. A group of lines/trunks that are to be used for this route. A pool must be programmed before any other route information.
  • Page 141 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection In addition to the fully programmable tables, ARS has four factory-set tables: Dial 0 Table. This factory-set table routes calls to numbers that start with 0. The international dialing code, 011, is treated as a special case and can be put into a programmable table.
  • Page 142 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection and remote access default Class of Restriction (COR) is assigned an FRL from 0 through 6. Each route is also assigned an FRL from 0 through 6. For extensions, 0 is the most restrictive and 6 is the least restrictive level.
  • Page 143 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection either behind another switch or used to select non-standard facilities. For Release 6.0 or later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), star codes are not sent over the network.
  • Page 144 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Table Selection 411, 611, 811, 911, or 10xx/101xxxxx (Equal Access Codes) If the caller dials one of these N11 or equal access (Interexchange or IXC) numbers, the call is routed over the main pool, using the factory-set Special Numbers (N11) Table.
  • Page 145 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection If more than seven digits have been dialed after the 1, the 1+7 Tables are eliminated. The next three digits following the 1 are compared to the 3-digit area codes in the Area Code Tables and the first three digits of the 6-Digit Tables;...
  • Page 146 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection START Is the dialed number 411, 611, Use Special 811, 911, or 10xxx Numbers Table (equal access code)? Use the table. Compare first three Is the first Is first NONE...
  • Page 147 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Route Selection within the Table Once the table is selected, ARS checks the subpatterns within the table (if applicable) and the restrictions on the routes (See Figure START Selected Table...
  • Page 148 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Subpattern B Is Call Time after Subpattern B Dial Call and start and before Select Table Subpattern B stop? Subpattern A Figure 3. Subpattern Selection Restrictions If the FRL for an extension, for a remote access barrier code, or for the remote...
  • Page 149 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), FRLs associated with extension numbers apply both to ARS calls and to local and non-local dial plan-routed calls over private networked trunks, including those used to reach non-local dial plan extension numbers.
  • Page 150 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection same ARS access code. For additional information, see ‘‘Tandem Switching’’ on page 699 ‘‘Uniform Dial Plan Features’’ on page 741. Calls made to the equal access code (10xxx) are always routed immediately over the main pool, whether or not they appear in other ARS tables.
  • Page 151 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Allowed/ ARS checks Allowed and Disallowed Lists before choosing the route Disallowed Lists for a call. This prevents users with restricted extensions from dialing numbers that are not on an Allowed List.
  • Page 152 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Display Only the ARS dial-out code and the dialed number are displayed. Digits added by ARS before the dialed number and digits ignored by ARS are not displayed.
  • Page 153 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Remote Access Remote access users can make calls by using ARS. They dial into the system, enter a barrier code if one is required, and dial the ARS code while listening to system dial tone.
  • Page 154 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Automatic Route Selection Tandem Switching Because equal access (IXC or Interexchange) calls from a system with (continued) no PSTN trunks require that local and remote ARS access codes match, the local ARS access code is automatically prefixed when these calls are sent to a networked system.

  • Page 155: Barge-In

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Barge-In Barge-In At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except single-line telephones Programming Code *58 (centralized telephone programming only) QCC Display Label Barge In Description...
  • Page 156 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Barge-In Telephone Differences Direct-Line Consoles If a DLC operator uses Barge-In to reach someone with Coverage or Forwarding (including Remote Call Forwarding) on, the call from the operator is not directed to the destination (receiver’s) extension.
  • Page 157 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Barge-In Direct Station After making a call to an extension by using a DSS button on a DLC, Selector you can activate Barge-In by pressing a programmed Barge-In button.
  • Page 158 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Barge-In Privacy Barge-In does not override Privacy. The caller hears a busy signal. All VMI ports always have Privacy on. Barge-In cannot be used to join calls to VMI ports. Recall/Timed Flash In Release 2.0 and later systems, you can use Recall if you have joined a call with Barge-In, and so can the user who has been...

  • Page 159: Basic Rate Interface (Bri)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Basic Rate Interface (BRI) At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, digital data users Reports Affected System Information (SysSet-up), BRI Information Modes Key, Hybrid/PBX Telephones...
  • Page 160 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Description BRI, like PRI, is a standard protocol for accessing Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) services. By using BRI, the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System can connect its users to the speed and accuracy of ISDN services.
  • Page 161 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Reliable Indication of Far-End Disconnect. This prevents an incoming call from being blocked because a line/trunk has not been released when a call is ended.
  • Page 162 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) A multiline hunt group consists of a group of BRI lines with one main telephone number (Directory Number). When this number is dialed by an outside caller, the central office tries to deliver the call to one of the BRI lines in the hunt group.
  • Page 163 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Calling Party Number The Calling Party Number (CPN) provides incoming calling party number information that identifies the originator of a call in the call-handling displays of MLX, ETR, or MLS telephones.
  • Page 164 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) in service or the first port in service on the first 800 NI-BRI module in the carrier. This can be changed through system programming. In the event of a maintenance failure of primary synchronization, backup synchronization can be provided by secondary and tertiary clock synchronization.
  • Page 165 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) For Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), refer to the Network Reference for information on clock switching for private networks. Timers and Counters This option sets the timer and counter thresholds.
  • Page 166 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) T309 Timer. Times the duration of a D-channel data link failure (a loss of signaling for the entire BRI connection). The value of this timer is 90 seconds.
  • Page 167 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Incoming BRI Calls (Non-Group Calling). When the calling party information is available from the network, the Calling Party Number (CPN) appears on the user’s display. Pressing the More button shows the Called Party Number on the second screen of the display.
  • Page 168 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) conditions applies: no SA button (aside from Originate Only buttons) is available; Do Not Disturb is activated; the extension is being programmed; the extension is forced idle;...
  • Page 169 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Remote Access A BRI line can be used for remote access. SMDR The number of a BRI line is shown in the LINE field of the SMDR report.

  • Page 170: Call Waiting

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Call Waiting Call Waiting At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Codes **11 Feature Code 87 (for call-waiting pickup) MLX Display Labels CallWaiting,On [CWait,On]...
  • Page 171 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Call Waiting Each extension can be programmed with Call Waiting on or off. The default is Call Waiting off. The user hears a call-waiting tone for the following types of calls that ring on an SA or ICOM button: An inside call A call received on a DID trunk...
  • Page 172 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Call Waiting An extension programmed as a fax extension can activate Call Waiting so that callers can wait until a fax machine is available. To prevent disruption of a fax message in progress, a call-waiting tone is not sent to a fax extension.
  • Page 173 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Call Waiting Feature Interactions Basic Rate Interface Call Waiting is provided on BRI lines at extensions so programmed. The call-waiting tone at an extension is not blocked by the BRI lines. Callback When Automatic Callback is used to queue a call at an extension that has Call Waiting, Callback overrides Call Waiting.
  • Page 174 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Call Waiting Direct-Line Console When a DLC operator uses Camp-On to transfer a call to a busy extension, the call is placed in the call-waiting queue and the caller hears the call-waiting tone, whether or not the extension has Call Waiting activated.
  • Page 175 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Call Waiting Recall/Timed Flash If Recall is used while a user is hearing special ringback, the call is disconnected and the user hears inside dial tone. Reminder Service Reminder calls are not eligible for Call Waiting.

  • Page 176: Callback

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Callback Callback At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Codes Auto on...
  • Page 177 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Callback Two types of Callback can be programmed for an extension: Automatic. Callback is activated automatically whenever the caller reaches a busy extension or when all lines/trunks in a pool are busy. This feature is set to on or off for each extension.
  • Page 178 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Callback When a call is waiting in queue for an extension, no new calls are sent to the extension until after the queued call is completed. When the queue contains 64 calls (system limit), additional calls sent to the queue receive a busy signal.
  • Page 179 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Callback Single-Line Telephones A single-line telephone user can make and receive other calls while waiting for the call to be completed. The request remains in the queue until the user who initiated the request is available.
  • Page 180 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Callback Calling Restrictions In Hybrid/PBX mode, a person with a restricted extension can use Callback for a busy pool because restrictions are based on the specific line/trunk being used to make the call. When a line/trunk in the busy pool is available, the system checks for restrictions assigned to the extension.
  • Page 181 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Callback Do Not Disturb Calls to extensions that are using Do Not Disturb are not eligible for callback queuing. If a callback originator is using Do Not Disturb, the system overrides the feature and the telephone rings when the busy extension or line/trunk is available.
  • Page 182 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Callback Group Calling Calls made to a calling group are not eligible for Callback because the calls ring into the calling group’s queue. Callback can be used, however, for calls to individual calling group member extensions or to delay announcement devices.
  • Page 183 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Callback Pools In Hybrid/PBX mode, Callback can be used to complete calls to an outside number only when all lines/trunks in the pool are busy. Primary Rate Callback cannot be used to request a busy PRI line assigned as a Interface and T1 personal line, but it can be used to request a line from a pool of PRI...
  • Page 184 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Callback System Access/ Selective Callback can be used from an SA or Shared SA button. Intercom Buttons The green LED next to the button at the telephone that originated (continued) Callback and all those next to other related SA and SSA buttons remain on.

  • Page 185: Caller Id

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Caller ID Caller ID At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected SMDR, System Information (SysSet-up), GS/LS Trunk Information Modes Telephones MLX, ETR, and MLS display telephones System Programming LinesTrunks More LS-ID Delay Entry Mode Caller ID Number/Name...
  • Page 186 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Caller ID When the button’s LED is lit, Calling Party Name and not Calling Party Number information appears and will continue to appear until you press the button again (the LED turns off).
  • Page 187 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Caller ID Facilities The interface to Caller ID is provided by the 800 GS/LS-ID, 408 GS/LS-ID-MLX, or 412 LS-ID-ETR line/trunk module. These modules support Caller ID only on loop- start lines.
  • Page 188 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Caller ID Calls returned after the transfer return interval expires also display standard incoming call identification information. Considerations and Constraints General An organization must subscribe to the Caller ID service in order for incoming calls through the 800 GS/LS-ID, 408 GS/LS-ID-MLX, or 412 LS-ID-ETR module to receive Caller ID information (loop-start lines only).
  • Page 189 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Caller ID Centrex Operation The 800 GS/LS-ID module can be used in Release 3.0 and later systems to capture Caller ID information (subscribed to from the central office on loop-start lines only, if available).
  • Page 190 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Caller ID Group Calling Caller ID information appears on the display. Outgoing call information is not displayed. In Release 6.1 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), Caller ID information can be passed across a private network that uses PRI tandem trunks.
  • Page 191 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Caller ID SMDR If you do not use any type of delay option and you are using a (continued) device with automatic pickup, or if you manually pick up the call before the Caller ID information arrives, IN appears in the NUMBER field and a C appears in the CALL TYPE field.

  • Page 192: Calling Restrictions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Calling Restrictions Calling Restrictions At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Directory, Extension Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information Modes Telephones System Programming Assign or remove outward/toll restriction for individual extensions:...
  • Page 193 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Calling Restrictions Assign or remove the ARS FRL associated with tie trunks used for Remote Access including private network calls for Release 6.0 or later systems: LinesTrunks RemoteAccss TIE Lines...
  • Page 194 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Calling Restrictions If the restrictions are too limiting, an Allowed List can be used in conjunction with calling restrictions. An Allowed List is a list of telephone numbers (such as emergency numbers) that a user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension can dial.
  • Page 195 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Calling Restrictions must have an FRL equal to or greater than the route’s FRL. The restrictions of the FRL assigned to an extension, therefore, are the opposite of the restrictions of an FRL assigned to a route.
  • Page 196 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Calling Restrictions A Night Service Exclusion List can be created to exempt specific extensions from the password requirement. Normal calling restrictions (if any) assigned to the extension, however, are still in effect.
  • Page 197 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Calling Restrictions If Centrex service is used, any calling restrictions for the extension must be programmed by the telephone company at the central office. Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode In Hybrid/PBX mode, all calling restrictions can be assigned.
  • Page 198 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Calling Restrictions Conference With an outward-restricted extension, you cannot add an outside participant to a conference unless the participant’s number is on that extension’s Allowed List. A user with a toll-restricted extension can only add a participant whose toll number is on an Allowed List assigned to the extension.
  • Page 199 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Calling Restrictions Personal Lines A user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension cannot dial a toll or outside number on a personal line button unless the number is on an Allowed List assigned to the extension, nor can the user dial a number on a Disallowed List.

  • Page 200: Camp-On

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Camp-On Camp-On At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones All except single-line telephones and data equipment Programming Code Feature Codes 87 (Call Waiting Pickup) MLX Display Label...
  • Page 201 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Camp-On Multiple calls can be camped on to individual extensions. To use Camp-On, the feature must be activated while the person is listening to ringing, a busy tone, or call-waiting ringback. Camp-On cannot be activated at other times, and no error tone sounds when a caller unsuccessfully tries to use Camp-On at an inappropriate time.
  • Page 202 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Camp-On Other Multiline Telephones Camp-On can be used with a multiline telephone when you hear ringing, a busy tone, or call-waiting ringback while transferring a call. To use Camp-On to complete the transfer, press a programmed Camp-On button, or press the Feature button and dial 57.
  • Page 203 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Camp-On Forward and You cannot use Camp-On to complete a transfer to an extension that has Follow Me any type of Remote Call Forwarding turned on. Group Calling You can transfer a call to a calling group by using Camp-On, but the call does not return to the originating extension, even if it is not answered...

  • Page 204: Centralized Voice Messaging

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centralized Voice Messaging Centralized Voice Messaging At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Modes Hybrid/PBX Description For MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems of Release 6.1 or later, a network functionality has been added that allows a MERLIN LEGEND System without a voice messaging system (VMS) to use the VMS of another MERLIN LEGEND System.

  • Page 205: Centrex Operation

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation Centrex Operation At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones All touch-tone telephones System Programming Specify mode of operation: SysProgram System Mode Assign host system conference dial code: Options More BehndSwitch Conference...
  • Page 206 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation NOTE: The term communications system here refers to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System, as distinguished from the Centrex system provided by the central office. Additional features, such as speed dialing and night service, may also be available from some telephone companies.
  • Page 207 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation The prime line is also used to call other 4-digit Centrex extension numbers that may be located at different sites served by the same telephone company. The communications system’s intercom lines are used to dial other extensions in the communications system.
  • Page 208 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation Limited Centrex With limited Centrex service, users depend principally on the communications system’s features, but a limited number of prime lines can be used to access the Centrex system.
  • Page 209 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation Differences between Full and Limited Centrex Full Centrex and limited Centrex differ in where and how PBX functions are provided: In full Centrex, the Centrex service provides PBX-like services to all extensions.
  • Page 210 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation LEGEND Communications System or anywhere in the PSTN. This saves line/ trunk resources. Full details of this operation and its feature interactions are discussed in ‘‘Forward and Follow Me’’...
  • Page 211 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation Reliable disconnect on loop-start lines is not required for Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding. When extensions are using the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature, do not program Music-On-Hold as the transfer audible.
  • Page 212 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation With limited Centrex in Hybrid/PBX mode, DID, tie, WATS, and T1 lines/trunks can be used. In Key mode, tie, WATS, and T1 lines/trunks can be used. These lines/ trunks cannot be used with full Centrex in Behind Switch mode.
  • Page 213 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode Hybrid/PBX mode can be used only in a limited Centrex configuration. In Releases prior to 2.0, a switchhook flash can be sent to the Centrex service only when the prime line is terminated either on a personal line or, when prime lines are shared, on a Pool button.
  • Page 214 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation or prime lines on later modules may be assigned incorrectly. If a DS1 module is used, it must be placed after all loop-start boards on the system so that default line assignments on the communications system are not affected.
  • Page 215 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation Centrex special or priority calls are indicated by two short rings followed by the personalized ring. Outside calls are indicated by one short ring followed by the personalized ring.
  • Page 216 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation Feature Interactions Authorization Code In Release 6.0 and later Key or Hybrid/PBX mode systems, you can activate or deactivate forwarding features, including Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding but excluding Follow Me, at an extension on the system by entering the authorization code for the extension on the same system from which calls are to be forwarded.
  • Page 217 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Centrex Operation SMDR In Release 6.0 and later systems, two SMDR call records can be generated for Centrex remote call-forwarded calls: one for the incoming or transferred call to the extension and one for the outgoing call to the remote telephone number.

  • Page 218: Conference

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference Conference At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information (SysSetup) Modes Telephones MLX, ETR, and MLS telephones and analog multiline telephones, except MLC-5 cordless telephone. Programming Codes ETR (and MLS) Drop button *777 (for ETR and MLS telephones in Hybrid/PBX or Key modes)
  • Page 219 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference NOTE: ETR and MLS telephones have no fixed Drop buttons. Instead a Drop button can be programmed in Hybrid/PBX and Key modes by dialing a programming code of *777 or by pressing the Feature button and dialing 777.
  • Page 220 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference After the system selects an SA button or the originator selects a line on an MLX display telephone, Line 2 displays the prompt Dial. The originator can either dial a number or select another line.
  • Page 221 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference Mode Differences Behind Switch Mode The fixed Conf button on multiline telephones activates conference from the host system. The dial codes for the host system for Conference and Drop must be system-programmed.
  • Page 222 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference and presses the Forced Release button; all participants are disconnected. If instead of pressing the Forced Release button, the operator hangs up, the conference is put on hold. When the operator arranges a three-participant conference (the operator and two other participants) and then presses the Release button or hangs up, the operator is released from the call and the other two participants remain connected.
  • Page 223 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference telephone does not have positive disconnect) after receiving a call or dialing the first outside number or extension. The participant automatically goes on hold. While on hold, an outside participant hears Music-On-Hold, if programmed, while an inside participant hears nothing.
  • Page 224 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference Barge-In Barge-In can be used to interrupt conference calls; all participants hear the Barge-In tone. Barge-In, however, does not connect you to a conference call if the conference already has the maximum number of participants.
  • Page 225 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference Conference In Behind Switch mode, the fixed-function Conf button applies to Centrex operation and is not recognized by the communications system. A button can be programmed for communications system Conference.
  • Page 226 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference Display As with any other call, the dialed digits appear on Line 1 of the display as you set up a conference call. On MLX and ETR telephones, Line 1 of the display shows the number of conference participants.
  • Page 227 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference Hold When adding other participants to a conference, the conference originator hears the hold reminder when the conference is on hold for longer than one minute (if the originator is a telephone user) or for longer than the operator hold timer setting (if the originator is an operator).
  • Page 228 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference Pickup You cannot pick up a conference call at another extension. A conference originator, however, can pick up a call and add it to the conference.
  • Page 229 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Conference Signal/Notify Signal and Notify can be used during a conference. SMDR When a conference call includes inside and outside participants, records are generated only for outside participants. If you drop a call from a conference call, it is considered a completed call and is recorded.

  • Page 230: Coverage

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Coverage At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Information, Group Coverage Information, Operator Information System Information ( SysSet-up Modes...
  • Page 231 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage System Programming Assign extensions to a coverage sender group: Extensions More Group Cover Assign a calling group as a Group Coverage receiver: Extensions More Grp Calling GrpCoverage In releases prior to 4.1, change number of rings before call is sent to Group Coverage receivers:...
  • Page 232 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Maximums Individual Coverage receivers for each extension (sender) Group Coverage receivers 8 (not counting QCC queue) for each coverage group (senders) Group memberships for each extension (sender) Cover buttons for each multiline telephone (receiver)
  • Page 233 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Shared SA buttons. A coverage sender, whose calls are covered, can be an individual extension ( Individual Coverage ) or a group of extensions ( Group Coverage ).
  • Page 234 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage NOTE: You cannot program a button for Individual Coverage to cover calls for an extension located on another system. In Release 4.1 and later systems, the system manager sets additional ring delays for each extension, rather than programming only systemwide settings.
  • Page 235 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Table 4. Ring Delays Affecting Coverage — Continued Factory Timer Setting Range Description Primary Cover 2 rings 1–6 rings Release 4.1 and later systems, programmable for each Ring Delay extension.
  • Page 236 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Ring Timing Options, summarized in Table 5, are programmable on any buttons, including programmed Cover buttons on multiline telephones. Table 5. Ring Timing Options Factory Option Setting Range...
  • Page 237 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Group Coverage Up to 30 coverage groups can be programmed for the system. Group Coverage is an arrangement in which senders are organized into coverage groups , and calls received by any unavailable group member are sent to one or more receivers.
  • Page 238 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage A calling group can be assigned, through system programming, as a receiver for up to 30 coverage groups. When a calling group is programmed as a receiver for a coverage group, a call to a coverage group member enters the calling group queue and waits for an available calling group member.
  • Page 239 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage To turn coverage off or on, the sender must have a programmed Coverage Off button. Coverage Inside prevents or allows coverage of inside calls: — With Coverage Inside Off, only outside calls are covered, including calls from another system in the network.
  • Page 240 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), non-local UDP calls are treated as outside calls by the system and by Selective Coverage features: Coverage Off, Coverage Inside, and Coverage VMS off.
  • Page 241 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage If a sender sets the Ring Timing option for No Ring on any personal line, Pool, SA, or ICOM buttons, calls arriving on those buttons do not go to coverage.
  • Page 242 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage The type of Group Coverage receivers programmed: — Only Group Cover buttons on multiline telephones. — Both Group Cover buttons and the QCC queue. — Only the QCC queue. —...
  • Page 243 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage A sender is considered unavailable (his or her telephone does not ring) under the following conditions: The sender has turned on Do Not Disturb. All SA or ICOM buttons are in use on the sender’s telephone. The sender is using extension programming or testing the telephone.
  • Page 244 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Group Coverage receivers in Release 4.0 and prior systems. In both tables, the rules for sending calls to Group Coverage apply after the calls first go to any available Individual Coverage receivers (as described in Table 6 on page 176).
  • Page 245 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Table 8. Group Coverage Call delivery Rules (Release 4.1 and Later Systems) — Continued Sender Primary Coverage Secondary Coverage Sent to Group Receiver Type Status Receiver Status Receiver Status Coverage after...
  • Page 246 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Settings: Primary Cover Ring Delay = 2 rings Secondary Cover Ring Delay = 2 rings Group Coverage Ring Delay = 3 rings Sender is available Red LED on Receiver A Immediate ring...
  • Page 247 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Settings: Delay Ring Interval = 2 rings Secondary Delay Interval = 3 rings Immediate ring Receiver A Group Cover Ring option: Group 1 Immediate Green LED flashes immediately Receiver B...
  • Page 248 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Settings: Primary Cover Ring Delay = 2 rings Secondary Cover Ring Delay = 2 rings Group Coverage Ring Delay = 3 rings Red LED on Receiver A Immediate ring Primary Cover...
  • Page 249 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Settings: Delay Ring Interval = 2 rings Secondary Delay Interval = 2 rings Coverage Delay Interval = 3 rings Receiver A Primary Cover Ring option: Ext.
  • Page 250 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Cover to Voice Mail with Escape to System Operator When DID or an Auto Attendant is used, users receive calls directly, without the intervention of an operator. In these situations, the telephone should have voice mail coverage instead of coverage by a receptionist (operator).
  • Page 251 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Primary Coverage If eight or fewer extensions require coverage to the system operator, use delayed Primary Coverage or Secondary Coverage to allow calls to be covered by the operator.
  • Page 252 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage keeps ringing, depending on the Coverage VMS Off status on the extension for the DID number. When the operator answers and the caller asks to leave a message, the operator uses Direct Voice Mail to transfer the caller to the extension’s voice mail.
  • Page 253 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Call comes in for ext 101. Rings at ext 101. Covers to Operator Operator answers Operator transfers to 201 (Voice Mail). Figure 12. Phantom Calling Groups Phantom Extensions If more than 30 extensions require coverage to the operator, phantom extensions can be used after the maximum number of phantom calling groups is reached.
  • Page 254 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Assign Shared SA buttons for the phantom extension to the real extension. Figure 13, SSA buttons for 214 were assigned to 114.) Remove all but one SA button for the real extension.
  • Page 255 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Cover to Personal Secretary before Voice Mail If you need coverage by a personal secretary who is not a system operator at an operator console, then Primary Coverage can be used on the secretary’s telephone.
  • Page 256 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Considerations and Constraints In Release 2.0 and later systems, if a receiver calls a sender for whom he or she is covering and the sender is busy or unavailable, the call proceeds to other points of coverage.
  • Page 257 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage A QCC cannot be a coverage sender. When Group Coverage is the only type of coverage programmed for a sender, the QCC queue should not be programmed along with Group Cover buttons on multiline telephones.
  • Page 258 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Night Service status just as other programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons do. The status of programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons is always set to match the most recent user press or transition into or out of Night Service operation.
  • Page 259 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage If the QCC return ring interval is longer than the Coverage Delay Interval (releases prior to 4.1) or the Group Coverage Delay setting (Release 4.1 and later systems), the call returns as a Group Coverage call.
  • Page 260 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Barge-In Barge-In can be used to join an Individual or Group Coverage call answered at any receiver extension, but not at a VMI port. VMI ports always have Privacy on.
  • Page 261 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Digital Data Calls Individual Coverage is not recommended for 2B data calls. Because a coverage receiver can have only one Cover button for each coverage sender, only a 1B data call arrives at the receiver. The second call of a 2B call continues to ring at the coverage sender.
  • Page 262 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Do Not Disturb When a sender turns on Do Not Disturb, Individual Coverage or Group Coverage receivers for that sender can call the sender. All other calls to the sender go to coverage.
  • Page 263 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Group Calling A calling group can be a receiver for up to 30 coverage groups. A calling group cannot be a receiver for Individual Coverage. A coverage group can have only one calling group as a receiver, but members of the coverage group can also have Individual Coverage receivers.
  • Page 264 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Hold Coverage calls answered by any type of receiver can be put on hold. The hold timer or operator-hold timer applies to a coverage call on hold.
  • Page 265 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Personal Lines Assigning a sender as the principal user of a personal line specifies that the calls received on the personal line are sent to the principal user’s individual and group receivers.
  • Page 266 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage Ringing Options Calls received on line buttons programmed for No Ring are not sent to coverage. Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, and Group Cover buttons can be programmed for Immediate Ring, Delay Ring, or No Ring.
  • Page 267 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Coverage System Access/ A covered call remains on the sender’s SA or ICOM button until it is Intercom Buttons answered at the receiver’s telephone. Once answered by a receiver, the call is removed from the sender’s SA (including Shared SA) or ICOM button.When a calling group is programmed as a Group Coverage receiver, however, the call is removed from the sender’s...

  • Page 268: Cti (Computer Telephony Integration) Link

    CTI applications to interact with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System over a local area network (LAN). The CTI link is the system’s hardware and software interface to the Lucent Technologies ® PassageWay Telephony Services product, which supports the Windows ®...
  • Page 269 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Passageway Direct Connect is supported only on MLX telephones. In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), operation of LAN clients using PassageWay Telephony Services applications connected via a CTI link depends on the application implemented and the type of private trunks that connect the networked communications systems.
  • Page 270 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link NOTE: If the MLX module for the CTI link is the only MLX module in the system, SPM software, version 5.15 or later, is also required in order to program the CTI link.
  • Page 271 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link For more information about these requirements and about installing a CTI link, see the PassageWay Telephony Services Network Manager’s Guide . Screen Pop Screen pop occurs when a CTI application takes inside or outside caller information, queries a database, and displays caller information on a user’s PC...
  • Page 272 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link NOTES: Some CTI applications can initiate screen pop from the called number on a BRI or PRI line. To find out whether this feature is available, check your application’s documentation.
  • Page 273 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Collected Digits As noted in the previous section, another method of using the screen pop capability is to display a screen based on information entered directly by the caller rather than based on the caller’s telephone number.
  • Page 274 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Basic Call Control A CTI application on your PC can control an extension’s SA button operations. No other buttons (for example, personal lines) are monitored by applications or are allowed to perform the CTI services.
  • Page 275 CAUTION: The Maintenance procedures that you use to busy-out and restore a module are normally reserved for Lucent Technologies technicians only. When you add a CTI link, the system performs the following actions: Reverts button programming to the default for a non-operator MLX telephone.
  • Page 276 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link system planning forms for extensions and groups (for example, Form 4d, MLX Telephone, and Form 7c, Group Coverage). Appendix D includes instructions for removing button programming.
  • Page 277 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link you later connect to the jack will not function as such. For more information about 2B data, see ‘‘Digital Data Calls’’ on page 223.
  • Page 278 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link For an incoming call, if the PassageWay Telephony Services application uses the length of ANI information to differentiate PSTN calls from UDP calls, a PassageWay Telephony Services client displays a non-local UDP call as an inside call.
  • Page 279 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Mode Differences Key and Behind Switch Modes A CTI link cannot be used with communications systems operating in Key mode or Behind Switch mode. Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles Because an operator position cannot use a CTI application, a call to an operator...
  • Page 280 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Single-Line Telephones Single-line telephone extensions cannot take advantage of CTI applications. Feature Interactions Alarm When a CTI link is reset (called a broadcast reset ), any programmed Alarm buttons on operator consoles or connected alarm devices go on.
  • Page 281 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Direct-Line Calls to DLCs not using a CTI application do not initiate screen pop at Console the operator extension; when transferred or conferenced—even if they (continued) arrive on the DLCs personal line button—they do initiate screen pop at a destination extension using a CTI application.
  • Page 282 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link System Access/ CTI allows software on a worktop application to control the following: Intercom Buttons Placing a call on hold Retrieving a call from hold Inside transfer and three-party conference Answering Hanging up on the SA buttons of an extension using the...

  • Page 283: Digital Data Calls

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Digital Data Calls Digital Data Calls At a Glance Users Affected Users with digital data communications devices or videoconferencing systems only Reports Affected Extension Directory, Extension Information Modes Key, Hybrid/PBX Factory Settings...
  • Page 284 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Digital Data Calls communications. 2B data is described in more detail in ‘‘2B Data’’ later in this topic. If a videoconferencing system requires two B-channels but does not have an ISDN-BRI interface (some older group video systems have V.35 interfaces, for example), it may need to use the adjunct extension numbers of two different MLX extension jacks.
  • Page 285 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Digital Data Calls NOTE: For more information about 2B data, see the Data/Video Reference . Devices used for 2B data must be connected to MLX jacks that are programmed as 2B data-capable.
  • Page 286 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Digital Data Calls extension. Therefore, only one call of a 2B data call is sent to the receiver, and the second call continues to ring at the sending system. (See “Feature Interactions,”...
  • Page 287 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Digital Data Calls Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles QCCs cannot be programmed for 2B data. If a DLC is programmed for 2B data, the DLC cannot be changed to a QCC unless 2B data programming is first removed from the DLC.
  • Page 288 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Digital Data Calls Callback Although video systems can use either off-hook or on-hook Callback, (continued) you should only use off-hook Callback for 2B data connections. If you use on-hook Callback, the returning callback call is connected using only one B-channel.
  • Page 289 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Digital Data Calls Last Number Dial Terminal adapters can use Last Number Dial by dialing the Last Number Dial feature code. Last Number Dial can be activated by video systems that can dial strings and feature codes that begin with Messaging Messaging features are not available for data or video extensions, but...
  • Page 290 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Digital Data Calls Privacy Privacy is activated automatically for digital data calls. Reminder Service Digital communications devices and videoconferencing systems cannot receive reminder calls. Remote Access Data calls cannot be made into lines programmed for remote access.

  • Page 291: Direct-Line Console

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct-Line Console Direct-Line Console At a Glance Users Affected DLC operators only Reports Affected System Information (SysSet-up), Operator Information, Extension Information Modes Telephones ® MLX-20L, MLX-28D Analog Multiline BIS-22D, BIS-34, BIS-34D, MERLIN II System Display Console...
  • Page 292 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct-Line Console Description A Direct-Line Console (DLC) is an answering position that system operators use Answer outside calls that are not directed to an individual user or group. Answer inside calls.
  • Page 293 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct-Line Console In Release 6.1 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), a DSS button can be used to access a non-local extension, but an inside Auto Dial button cannot.
  • Page 294 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct-Line Console equipment is connected to analog extension jacks that are assigned as DLCs. Two DLCs on the same module must be assigned for each CMS (maximum of two) connected to the system.
  • Page 295 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct-Line Console MLX Telephones An MLX-20L assigned as a DLC can also be used for system programming by connecting it to any of the first five extension jacks on the first MLX module and designating the extension jack for system programming.
  • Page 296 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct-Line Console Call Waiting and When a DLC operator uses Camp-On to transfer a call to a busy Camp-On extension, the call is placed in the call-waiting queue and the caller hears the call-waiting tone, whether or not the extension has Call Waiting activated.
  • Page 297 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct-Line Console Forward and A DLC operator can forward calls to local and non-local extensions and, if Follow Me the capability is assigned in system programming, to outside telephone numbers.
  • Page 298 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct-Line Console Night Service A Night Service button is assigned only to operators and is used to activate and deactivate Night Service. It is factory-assigned to analog DLCs on button 31.
  • Page 299 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct-Line Console Speed Dial System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed from the first DLC connected to the first (lowest) analog extension jack on the module in slot 01 of the control unit.

  • Page 300: Direct Station Selector

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Direct Station Selector At a Glance Users Affected Operators Reports Affected Operator Information Modes Telephones MLX-20L, MLX-28D System Programming Assign extension numbers selected when DSS buttons are pressed: More SysRenumber...
  • Page 301 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Message-waiting LED status Operator park zones Dialing of non-local extensions (Release 6.1 and later systems) The DSS, shown in Figure 15, has an array of 50 buttons, called DSS buttons , with red LEDs.
  • Page 302 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Each Page button range can begin with any extension number that is a multiple of 50, in the range of 0 to 9950. To speed call handling, however, the assignments should be sequential;...
  • Page 303 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector A DSS button can represent one of the following: Local extension number Non-local extension number Line/trunk number (801–880) Pool dial-out code (Hybrid/PBX mode only) Calling group extension number Paging group extension number Operator park zone extension number...
  • Page 304 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector The result of pressing a DSS button while on a call depends on the type of operator position, the type of button pressed, and whether the system is programmed for one-touch Hold or one-touch Transfer, as described in Table 10 Table...
  • Page 305 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Table 10. Results of Pressing DSS Button while Active on a Call: DLC Position with One-Touch Hold — Continued Extension Type Result Park zone Park zone applies to local extensions only.
  • Page 306 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Table 12. Results of Pressing DSS Button while Active on a Call: QCC Position Extension Type Result Individual or calling The caller is put on hold, the transfer is initiated, and the extension group is dialed automatically.
  • Page 307 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector DSS LED associated with the non-local dial plan are not updated for any feature including switchhook operation, therefore the extinguished appearance for a non- local dial plan extension does not indicate the true state of the extension.
  • Page 308 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Table 13. ED Meanings for Normal Call-Handling Operation — Continued LED Status Extension Type Meaning Calling group The calling group queue is at or above the allowable threshold (in Release 5.0 and later systems, at or above Threshold 3).
  • Page 309 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector The meaning of the red LED associated with each group member is shown in Table Table 14. LED Meanings for Supervisor Operation without Message Status Active Extension LED Status Status...
  • Page 310 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Table 15. LED Meanings for Hotel Extension Status Operation without Message Status Active Extension LED Status Status Meaning The room is occupied, and the extension is in regular call-handling state.
  • Page 311 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Message Status operation because Message Status shows only messages sent with the Send/Remove Message button. See ‘‘Messaging’’ on page 429 for more information about sending and receiving messages. For calling group or CMS supervisory operation or for Hotel Extension Status in Message Status operation, the red LED next to a DSS button for a user extension indicates whether or not a message has been sent by any of the operator...
  • Page 312 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Table 17. LED Meanings for Supervisor or Hotel Extension Status Operation with Message Status Active — Continued LED Status Extension Type Meaning ARS, Remote Not applicable;...
  • Page 313 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector In Release 6.1 and later systems a call to a non-local dial plan extension, using a DSS button at a QCC, will be automatically transferred if the extended call completion option at the QCC is programmed for Automatic Completion.
  • Page 314 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Direct Voice Mail On a QCC’s DSS, the Direct Voice Mail button is a fixed button, the rightmost button in the second row from the bottom. Direct Voice Mail functions only for extensions on the same system.
  • Page 315 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Headset Options In Release 7.0 and later systems, when the headset user receives a Voice Announce call, the DSS LED for the user lights. The DSS LED remains lit when the call is switched from the speaker to the headset.
  • Page 316 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Inspect Inspect can be used to determine the corresponding extension for each DSS button. To use Inspect, press the Page button for the range of extensions, press the Inspct button, and press each DSS button to see what it represents;...
  • Page 317 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Park Park zone codes cannot be assigned to DSS buttons on MERLIN II System Display Consoles. In order for the park zones to be assigned to a DSS connected to an MLX telephone, the extension numbers must be in the range programmed for the Page buttons.
  • Page 318 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Saved Number Dial An extension dialed by pressing a DSS button is not stored for Saved Number Dial. Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, a Service Observer can use a DSS button to enter a local extension number to establish an observing session.
  • Page 319 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Station Selector Transfer When one-touch Hold is programmed and an operator presses a (continued) DSS button with an inside caller on the line (or, in Hybrid/PBX mode, with an outside caller on an SA button), the call is not put on hold and a signal is sent to the extension corresponding to the DSS button pressed.

  • Page 320: Direct Voice Mail

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Voice Mail Direct Voice Mail At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Directory Modes Hybrid/PBX, Key Telephones MLX Display Label Direct VM [DrcVM] Programming Code Feature Code Description...
  • Page 321 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Voice Mail pressing the Direct Voice Mail button again) or when the call or transferred call has gone to voice mail. If you have a programmed Direct Voice Mail button, you can send a call directly to voice mail while transferring or making a call by pressing the Direct Voice Mail button.
  • Page 322 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Direct Voice Mail Single-Line Telephones If you already hear dial tone and want to call directly to an extension’s voice mail, dial #56 followed by the extension number. Single-line telephone users must press a Recall or Flash button and dial #56 to transfer a call to an extension’s voice mail.

  • Page 323: Directories

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Directories Directories At a Glance Users Affected System Directory Telephone users Extension Directory MLX display telephone users Personal Directory MLX-20L telephone users Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory, Label Information, System Directory, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes...
  • Page 324 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Directories Description The Directory feature is a built-in, interactive telephone book that stores listings of names and telephone or extension numbers. People with MLX display telephones can dial numbers by selecting listings from the display.
  • Page 325 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Directories Access the System Directory by lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker button, pressing the Feature button, and dialing a 3-digit System Speed Dial code. If the System Speed Dial code is associated with a telephone number that begins with a dial-out code (usually 9), you must use an SA or ICOM button.
  • Page 326 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Directories Extension numbers can be programmed in a Personal Directory. However, in Key and Behind Switch modes, an ICOM button must be pressed before selecting a listing to dial.
  • Page 327 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Directories MLX-20L Telephones While a Personal Directory on an MLX-20L telephone is being programmed, you cannot receive calls (the caller hears a busy signal), but you still can hear the telephone ringing.
  • Page 328 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Directories MLX-28D, MLX-16DP, MLX-10DP, MLX-10D, and MLX 5-D Telephones To use the System or Extension Directory, press the Menu button, select Directory from the display, then select either type of directory from the display. To begin searching, spell the name of the directory entry by using the dialpad.
  • Page 329 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Directories Digital Data Calls Digital communications devices and videoconferencing systems cannot make use of Extension, Personal, or System Directories. Display With an MLX display telephone, you can use the Extension and System Directories.
  • Page 330 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Directories Speed Dial System Speed Dial numbers are stored in the System Directory. MLX display telephone users can dial one by selecting the name from the display. If the number is on a marked System Directory listing, select the listing;...

  • Page 331: Display

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display Display At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Modes Telephones MLX display telephones, ETR display telephones, MLS display telephones, MERLIN II System Display Console, BIS-22D, BIS-34D System Programming ‘‘Labeling’’...
  • Page 332 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display telephone is used as the system programming console. (For information about system programming displays, see ‘‘Programming’’ on page 557.) Beginning with Release 3.0, when a number is displayed for an incoming call, it appears with hyphens inserted between the digits (for example, 555-1234 for a 7-digit number and 908-555-1234 for a 10-digit number).
  • Page 333 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display — If an incoming PRI call with ANI is routed over PRI tandem trunks, the trunk label and the calling party’s number appear on the MLX, ETR, or MLS display telephone at the extension where the call arrives.
  • Page 334 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display Table 18. Call-Handling Displays — Continued Sample Displays MLS/ Action Analog Multiline MLX/ETR If a caller dials 0 to reach a system operator or OPERATR 0 dials the LDN (the QCC queue extension), the display identifies the number as the operator.
  • Page 335 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display Table 18. Call-Handling Displays — Continued Sample Displays MLS/ Action Analog Multiline MLX/ETR For an incoming call from an extension in the non-local dial plan (Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only), only calls conveyed on private PRI tandem trunks display as shown.
  • Page 336 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display Considerations and Constraints The date and time shown on MLX telephones is controlled by the processor module in the control unit. When the date or time changes, the control unit sends the message to MLX telephones one at a time, which can cause a slight difference in the time and/or date displayed on each telephone.
  • Page 337 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display name or number of a caller, and the type of incoming call. In Release 2.0 and later systems, the date is shown as pictured in Figures and 17;...
  • Page 338 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display Menu Screen The Menu screen, illustrated in Figures and 19, lists features and functions that are used through the display, such as Alarm Clock and Directories. For everyone with displays, except QCC operators, the Menu screen also provides access to the extension programming function used to program the extension.
  • Page 339 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display Feature Screen The Feature screen provides quick access to commonly used features. Press the Feature button to display one of four Feature screens with feature names. The feature names shown depend on the current activity and how the system and the extension are programmed, as shown in Table...
  • Page 340 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display Table 19. Feature Screen Option — Continued Telephone Feature Options 2-by-24 Display 7-by-24 Display Is connected to an Last Number Dial Last# LastNumDial outside line Park Park Park...
  • Page 341 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display Privacy INSPECT MODE Home Menu Inspct More Figure 20. 2-Line Display Inspect Screen for Programmed Button Privacy More Home Inspct Menu INSPECT MODE Figure 21. 7-Line Display Inspect Screen for Programmed Button ETR Display Telephones The following types of information appear on Line 1 of the 2-line by 24-character...
  • Page 342 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Display NOTE: In general, Line 1 of an MLS display looks like an analog multiline display, and Line 1 of an ETR display looks like an MLX display. MLS and Analog Multiline Display Telephones The following types of information appear on Line 1 of the 2-line by 16-character display of an MLS telephone, and on the 1-line by 16-character or 2-line by...
  • Page 343 Feature Interactions Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Account Code Entry When you activate the feature, the display Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: Acct? Acct? prompts for an account code. Acct: Acct: As the code is dialed, it appears on the screen Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: Acct:123456...
  • Page 344 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Alarm Clock On an MLX telephone, you program the Alarm May 08 12:00 ALARM: On Clock feature from the Menu screen. On an 2:00 p analog multiline telephone, you set the alarm by using the timekeeping buttons next to the display.
  • Page 345 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Automatic Route Selection Only the ARS dial-out code and the dialed Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: 95551234 95551234 number are displayed. Digits added by ARS OUTSIDE OUTSIDE before the dialed number and digits ignored by 5551234 5551234 ARS are not displayed.
  • Page 346 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Callback When you queue a call by using Automatic Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: Callback on an MLX, ETR, MLS, or analog Queued MARIA Queued MARIA multiline telephone, or by using Selective 1234 1234 Callback on an analog multiline telephone, a...
  • Page 347 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Callback (continued) If the busy pool becomes available before the Page 1, Line1: Page 1, Line1: 9571022 9571022 caller hangs up, a message appears. OUTSIDE OUTSIDE 9571022 9571022 When the call queued for a pool rings at your Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: Callbck...
  • Page 348 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Call Waiting When a call is waiting, a message appears. Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: No display No display change change JOHN Ext 46 JOHN Ext 46 Page 1, Line 2: (No display (receive waiting (receive waiting change)
  • Page 349 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Conference As with any other call, dialed digits appear on Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: 1234 1234 Line 1 of the display as you set up a conference Ext 1234 Ext 1234 call.
  • Page 350 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Conference (continued) During the conference, the number of Page 1, Line 1: participants is shown on Line 1 of the display. OUTSIDE The conference originator can view Caller ID or 9571022 ISDN calling party information, if available, Page 2, Line 1: associated with any participant by pressing the Trk801...
  • Page 351 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Coverage (continued) Do Not Disturb on Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: Cov DND-JUAN Cov DND-JUAN Cover JUAN DND Cover JUAN DND Page 2, Line 1: Page 2, Line 1: Caller: Ext Caller: Ext (No timeout) Date and Time On an ETR, MLS, or analog multiline...
  • Page 352 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Do Not Disturb When a user with coverage turns on Do Not Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: COV DND-RUBEN COV DND-RUBEN Disturb, the receiver who answers sees a Cover RUBEN Cover RUBEN message showing that the call is redirected because the sender has Do Not Disturb on.
  • Page 353 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Extension Status When the room has been selected and the supervisor has selected ES0, ES1, or ES2, confirmation is displayed. ES0 = Occupied Page 1, Line 2: Occupied ES1 = Checked Out Page 1, Line 2: Checked out ES2 = Available Page 1, Line 2:...
  • Page 354 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Follow Me When Follow Me is turned on or off, MLX Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: telephone users see a prompt, then a Follow from: Follow from: confirmation. ETR telephone users see only the Page 1, Line 2: (No timeout);...
  • Page 355 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Forward (continued) Forward an outside call Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: Forwd- Forwd- Forward from Forward from OPERATR OPERATR Pre-select Pre-select OPERATR> OPERATR> Page 2, Line 1: Page 2, Line 1: shows: shows: Caller;...
  • Page 356 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Group Calling (continued) When a group member with an MLX or ETR Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: No display No display telephone receives an outside call for the change; pre- change; pre- SALES OUTSIDE SALES OUTSIDE group, the type of call appears on the display...
  • Page 357 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Inspect With an MLX telephone, you can inspect the Page 1, Line 1: contents of programmed buttons by pressing Account Code the Inspct button and then the programmed button. In most cases, the display shows the feature or line assigned to the button.
  • Page 358 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Messaging When you send a message to another Page 1, Line 2: No display Msg Sent CARL Msg Sent CARL telephone, a feedback message appears. change Msg. Sent to: CARL When you try to retrieve messages and the Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: No Messages...
  • Page 359 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Messaging (continued) After the number is dialed, a confirmation is Page 1, Line 2: displayed. Msg sent to: MARIA Msg rmvd from: DOROTHY When you try to leave a message to a non- Page 1, Line 2: No display Cannot Send Cannot Send...
  • Page 360 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Night Service (continued) When a DID call comes in to a Night Service Page 1, line 1: Page 1, line 1: OUTSIDE; OUTSIDE; group, a message appears. Pre-select shows Pre-select shows OUTSIDE OUTSIDE Page 2, Line 1: Page 2, Line 1: OUTSIDE OUTSIDE...
  • Page 361 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Personal Lines (continued) When a Caller ID call comes in, a message Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: No display No display appears. change. Pre- or change. Pre- or OUTSIDE 732- OUTSIDE 732- 957-9684 or 957-9684 or post-select...
  • Page 362 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Pools When you select a Pool button on a display Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: No display No display telephone and lift the handset, the display change change OUTSIDE OUTSIDE shows the lines in the selected pool. 9571022 9571022 (No timeout)
  • Page 363 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Reminder Service When Reminder Set is activated, the extension Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: 17: No Rmdr 17: No Rmdr number and either the set time or an indication Time: Time: that no time has been set is displayed. Page 1, Line 2: (No timeout) 17:No reminder...
  • Page 364 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Reminder Service (continued) When an MLX operator sets or cancels a No display No display No display Press DSS Key reminder for an extension, he or she is change change change to Select prompted for the extension. Reminder Set Press DSS Key to Select...
  • Page 365 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Saved Number Dial On an MLX telephone, when you press a Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: No display No display programmed Saved Number Dial button, a JOHN Ext 26 change change JOHN Ext 26 confirmation is displayed.
  • Page 366 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline System Speed Dial (continued) When you press a marked System Speed Dial Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: button, the number dialed appears on the OUTSIDE 611 OUTSIDE 611 display. (No timeout) Timer MLX and analog multiline display telephones Page 1, Line 2: 12:00a 39:15...
  • Page 367 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Transfer (continued) On an MLX telephone, a confirmation is Page 1, Line 2: Page 1, Line 1: displayed. Date Call No display No display Transferred change change When inside calls return from transfer, the Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: Trf Ret–...
  • Page 368 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline Transfer (continued) On an MLX or ETR telephone, if you receive a Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: Transfer Transfer transferred inside call, the transferred and the Transfr ANGELA Transfr ANGELA Receive Receive transferring extensions appear.
  • Page 369 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline UDP Displays (continued) Call arriving on an extension programmed for Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: No display No display extension or ANI calling number only change; Pre- or change; Pre- or OUTSIDE Ext OUTSIDE Ext post-select: post-select:...
  • Page 370 Sample Displays Feature/Description Analog Multiline UDP Displays (continued) BRI line assigned to a calling group with a non- Page 1, Line 1: Page 1, Line 1: No display No display local member 2000 over PRI private network change; Pre- or change;...

  • Page 371: Do Not Disturb

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC and single-line telephones Programming Code MLX Display Label DO NOT DISTURB [DND]...
  • Page 372 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Do Not Disturb the message. You can also post and remove the message by using a programmed Posted Messages button. Using this button, however, only posts or removes the message;...
  • Page 373 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Do Not Disturb NOTE: Do not press the Posted Messages button; the LED blinks but no message is posted. Single-Line Telephones Do Not Disturb is not available on single-line telephones. Feature Interactions Auto Dial When you turn on Do Not Disturb, the green LEDs next to all Auto Dial...
  • Page 374 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Do Not Disturb Display In Release 2.0 and later systems, when a multiline telephone user with coverage turns on Do Not Disturb and calls are sent to coverage receivers, the receiver with a display sees a message when answering the call;...
  • Page 375 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Do Not Disturb Multi-Function Using Do Not Disturb is not recommended because the device connected Module to the MFM does not have an LED to indicate when the feature is active. Paging Group pages cannot be made to a telephone with Do Not Disturb on.

  • Page 376: Drop

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Drop Drop ‘‘Conference’’ on page 158.

  • Page 377: Extension Status

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Extension Status Extension Status At a Glance Users Affected DLC operators, hotel supervisors/rooms, calling group supervisors/members, Call Management System (CMS) supervisors/members Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, SMDR, System Information (SysSet-up), Extension Information Modes Telephones...
  • Page 378 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Extension Status NOTE: For more information about calling groups, see ‘‘Group Calling’’ page 350. Description Extension Status allows an operator, or a calling group or a Call Management System (CMS) supervisor with a Direct-Line Console (DLC), to monitor extension status.
  • Page 379 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Extension Status Table 21. Extension Status for Calling Group/CMS Mode Extension Status LED Status Meaning Telephone is logged out from group; member is unavailable to take calls. Flashing Used for CMS only;...
  • Page 380 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Extension Status Extension Status cannot be changed from rotary telephones. When the system restarts (for example, for maintenance) in Hotel mode, and the calling group type is set for Auto Logout (see ‘‘Group Calling’’...
  • Page 381 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Extension Status NOTE: MLX display telephone users see only the first three characters dialed (for example, F76) when changing the status of telephones. In either Hotel or Calling Group/CMS mode, regular multiline telephone users can change to Status 1 or Status 2 by pressing a programmed button for each status, or by pressing the Feature button and dialing the feature code (45 for Status 1 or 44 for Status 2).

  • Page 382: Fax Extension

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Fax Extension Fax Extension At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory, Extension Information, Label Information Modes Telephones Tip/ring for fax extension.
  • Page 383 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Fax Extension The Fax Message Threshold setting is the length of time (0–30 seconds) before the system assumes that a fax has arrived. When a fax extension answers a call, the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System waits until the fax message threshold is exceeded and then sends a message-waiting indication to the designated message-waiting extensions(s).
  • Page 384 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Fax Extension Considerations and Constraints A fax extension can send a message-waiting indication, but it cannot be assigned as a message-waiting receiver for another fax or for a calling group. If a fax message-waiting indication is deleted by one of the four message-waiting receivers, the message is deleted from all of the telephones programmed as message-waiting receivers for the fax.

  • Page 385: Forced Account Code Entry

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forced Account Code Entry Forced Account Code Entry ‘‘Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry’’ on page...

  • Page 386: Forward And Follow Me

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Forward and Follow Me At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information, Operator Information Modes Telephones Sending All except QCC Receiving Programming Code Forward...
  • Page 387 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Description Forward and Follow Me provide two ways for a user to send calls to another number. Calls can be forwarded to: An inside extension—for example, when a user is temporarily working at a different desk.
  • Page 388 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me The factory setting for Remote Call Forwarding does not permit users to forward calls to outside numbers. Through system programming, use of the feature can be allowed for individual extensions.
  • Page 389 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me CAUTION: Make sure that calls are not forwarded back and forth between private network users because facilities will be tied up. For example, if a user at System A forwards calls to a user at System B, and the user at System B forwards them back to the user at System A, the call bounces back and forth tying up facilities along the way until all trunks are busy.
  • Page 390 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me The following rules apply to Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding: Only outside calls arriving on loop-start Centrex lines can be forwarded by using this feature.
  • Page 391 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me ringback or a busy tone from the central office. This can confuse outside callers, who may hang up. Two SMDR call records can be generated for Centrex remote call-forwarded calls: one for the incoming or transferred call to the extension and one for the outgoing call to the remote telephone number.
  • Page 392 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me — In Release 6.0 (Hybrid/PBX mode only), Forward is not supported across a private network. — In Release 6.1 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), Forward is supported across a private network.
  • Page 393 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Outside calls received on PRI lines with routing by dial plan. For Release 6.0 or later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), private network calls.
  • Page 394 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me NOTES: Programming a loop-start line as reliable when, in fact, it does not provide reliable disconnect signaling leaves the line in a permanent busy condition after a call on that line has been forwarded to an outside number.
  • Page 395 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Delayed Forwarding In Release 4.0 and later systems, each user can program a Forwarding Delay setting for calls that are forwarded using Forward, Remote Call Forwarding, or Follow Me.
  • Page 396 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me ability is assigned, only the principal user of a personal line can forward calls on that line to an outside number. If a principal user is not assigned, calls on a personal line cannot be forwarded to an outside number.
  • Page 397 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me red LED next to the DSS button or the green LED next to the Auto Dial button does not flash. The reasons that a call may ring for more than the programmed Delayed Call Forwarding setting are the following: If a button is programmed as Delayed Ring, the Forwarding Delay begins after the Delayed Ring period ends.
  • Page 398 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me calls must arrive on analog Centrex loop-start lines (reliable disconnect not required). Telephone Differences In Release 6.0 and later systems, you can activate or deactivate Forward or Remote Call Forwarding from a local system telephone by first entering your authorization code.
  • Page 399 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Other Multiline Telephones To forward calls to an extension, either press a programmed Forward button and dial the destination extension number, or press the Feature button, dial 33, and dial the destination extension number.
  • Page 400 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me At a destination (receiving) multiline telephone, to cancel Forward and Follow Me from other local extensions, press the Feature button, dial *34, and do either of the following: To cancel forwarding from one local extension, dial that extension.
  • Page 401 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me To cancel Forward, any type of Remote Call Forwarding, or Follow Me at the originating single-line telephone, lift the handset and dial #33 and your own extension number, in effect, “forwarding”...
  • Page 402 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Authorization Code In Release 6.0 and later Key or Hybrid/PBX mode systems, you can activate or deactivate forwarding features, including Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding but excluding Follow Me, at an extension on the system by entering the authorization code for the extension on the same system from which calls are to be forwarded.
  • Page 403 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Caller ID The systemwide LS-ID delay, if programmed, augments the Forwarding Delay. The total delay is the LS-ID delay plus the Forwarding Delay. In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), Remote Call Forwarding can be used in combination with Caller ID on a loop-start PSTN line connected to a networked system’s 800 GS/LS-ID, 408 GS/LS-...
  • Page 404 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Coverage If a coverage receiver has activated any type of Remote Call Forwarding, calls sent to that extension by Coverage are not forwarded to the remote (continued) location.
  • Page 405 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Direct Voice Mail In Release 4.0 and later systems, if Forwarding is active and Delayed Forwarding is not set to zero rings, pressing the Direct Voice Mail button causes the call to go directly to voice mail coverage;...
  • Page 406 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Do Not Disturb In Release 4.0 and later systems, turning on Do Not Disturb at a (continued) forwarding extension causes calls to be forwarded immediately. The Forwarding Delay has no effect.
  • Page 407 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Night Service When Night Service is turned on, calls arriving for a Night Service group member can be forwarded to a local extension by using Forward or Follow Me.
  • Page 408 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me Remote Access To forward calls to an outside telephone number, dial *33 and the (continued) forwarding extension number. Then dial one of the following: the ARS or pool dial-out code (Hybrid/PBX mode only), the Idle Line Access code (usually 9;...
  • Page 409 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Forward and Follow Me SMDR In Release 6.0 and later systems, when a call comes into an extension that is a principal user with Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding (continued) activated, the initial incoming call may be of very short duration.

  • Page 410: Group Calling

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Group Calling At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Dial Plan Information, Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Information, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones Supervisor...
  • Page 411 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Assign maximum number of calls allowed in calling group queue (Release 6.0 and later systems): More More Extensions Grp Calling Queue Dial calling group ext. no. Dial no.
  • Page 412 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Assign message-waiting receiver for calling group: More Extensions Grp Calling Message Dial calling group ext. no. Dial ext. no. for Enter MWI receiver Enter Select/set overflow basis and/or threshold and designate calling group or QCC queue as overflow receiver: More...
  • Page 413 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Maximums Calling groups Extensions for each group 20 local, 1 non-local (Release 6.1 or later systems) Calling groups for each extension Calling groups for each line/trunk Delay announcement 200 can be shared among groups for Release 5.0 and later;...
  • Page 414 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Description Group Calling is used to direct incoming calls to a specific group of telephones (a calling group ). A calling group is a team of individuals who answer and handle the same kinds of calls—for example, high-volume work groups such as sales, service, marketing, repair, and technical support.
  • Page 415 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling When all calling group members are busy, inside callers who are transferred to the calling group hear a regular ringback and the call is sent to the calling group queue;...
  • Page 416 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling type is set to Auto Logout (the factory setting) and a call sent to a calling group member is not answered within 30 seconds (5 rings), the call is sent to another member or to the front of the queue if another calling group member is not available.
  • Page 417 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Queue control applies to the following types of calls: DID and dial-in tie trunk calls. PRI facilities programmed for dial-plan routing. Calls that are transferred from a VMI port. Calls transferred on an inside or private network line.
  • Page 418 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Table 23. Eligibility of Calling Group Calls for Queue Control Call Type Eligible Ineligible DID trunk (analog or emulated T1) Dial-plan routed facility Line-appearance routed facility Ground-start line/trunk (analog or emulated T1) Loop-start line (analog or emulated T1) Transferred/conferenced from operator or user...
  • Page 419 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling A Calls-in-Queue Alarm button (either on the console or on a DSS), programmed with the calling group’s extension, for monitoring calls in queue. A supervisor who manages more than one group needs a button for each group.
  • Page 420 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling selected based on when they last completed a calling group call, not on when they last received one. When an agent first logs into a group, he or she is most likely to be the most idle and receive the next call.
  • Page 421 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Group A (Home Group) Priority: 1 Label: Sales Group B (Support Group) Priority: 2 Label: Service Figure 22. Home Calling Group with a Support Calling Group As a further extension of the example in Figure 22, two groups can support each...
  • Page 422 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Group A (Support Group for Home Group B) Priority: 1 Label: Sales Group B (Support Group for Home Group A) Priority: 2 Label: Service Figure 23.
  • Page 423 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Group A Group B Group C (Home Group) (Home Group) (Home Group) Priority: 1 Priority: 2 Priority: 3 Label: Sales Label: Service Label: Admin Group D (Support Group) Priority: 4...
  • Page 424 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Group A (Home Group) Priority: 1 Label: Sales Group B (Home & Support Group) Priority: 2 Label: Service Group C (Support Group) Priority: 3 Label: General Figure 25.
  • Page 425 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling NOTE: In Release 6.1 and later systems, no delay announcement device should be assigned for the calling group that contains the single non-local extension, because this calling group member is always available. When no calling group members are available and calls enter the calling group queue, the announcement device, as it becomes available, answers the call that has been waiting longest and plays the recorded message.
  • Page 426 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling announcement’s length and the anticipated number of calls in queue during a busy time. NOTE: ‘‘Using Alarm Thresholds to Monitor the Effectiveness of Delay Announcements’’...
  • Page 427 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Message-Waiting Receiver The message-waiting receiver is the extension designated to receive message-waiting indications for the calling group. This includes message-waiting indications sent from an operator, from a display telephone using Leave Message, or from a fax machine.
  • Page 428 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling recommended, because the telephone alerts continuously with a tone while the number of calls in the calling group queue is equal to or greater than the programmed threshold or in Release 5.0 and later systems, Threshold 3 (see the discussion later in this topic).

  • Page 429: Overflow Threshold

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling These thresholds can be used to assess the effectiveness of delay announcements. See ‘‘Using Alarm Thresholds to Monitor the Effectiveness of Delay Announcements’’ on page 373 for details.
  • Page 430 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling based on the number of calls in the queue or the time spent in the queue takes precedence over calls that go to overflow because of the caller’s prompt. Prompt-Based Overflow In Release 6.0 and later systems, system managers can activate the Prompt- Based Overflow option.
  • Page 431 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Calling Group Overflow Receiver Calls do not go to an overflow receiver that is a calling group until each of the following conditions is met: The number of calls in the queue is equal to or greater than the programmed overflow threshold, or the time a call has been in the queue exceeds the overflow threshold time.
  • Page 432 Generic VMI. This setting is used when a voice messaging system (such as Lucent Technologies Attendant or Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant) that does not require special signaling is connected to one or more extension jacks assigned to a calling group.
  • Page 433 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Music-On-Hold sources, however, work only for the system where they reside. In Release 6.0 systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), each networked system should include its own voice mail and/or Auto Attendant applications as well as its own external alerts and Music-On-Hold sources.
  • Page 434 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Table 24. Checking the Effectiveness of Delay Announcements Calls Waiting Length of Max. # of Calls for Secondary Secondary Announcement in Queue before Announcement Announcement Interval in Alarm Signals...
  • Page 435 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Considerations and Constraints An extension can be a member of only one calling group. Calling groups with no members are allowed. A calling group cannot contain both local and non-local members. If a calling group has a non-local member, that member must be the only member in the calling group.
  • Page 436 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling The Most Idle hunting method (Release 5.0 and later systems only) ignores non- calling group calls. For example, if an agent transfers a call that was answered on any personal line, the calling group member’s most-idle status is unaffected.
  • Page 437 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling list is assigned to the VMI ports; it includes the following entries: 0, 10, 11, 1809, 1700, 1900, 976, 1ppp976, *, (p=any digit). In Release 4.1 and later systems, changes to Group Calling coverage delays affect the Integrated Administration feature of Integrated Solution III (IS III).
  • Page 438 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling When a call is retrieved from the Home calling group’s queue by a Support calling group member, the Support calling group display telephone shows the Home calling group’s label for the call type.
  • Page 439 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Unavailable), and pressing the Auto Dial or DSS button for the group member’s extension number. Direct Station Selector In Release 5.0 and later systems, the state of a DSS button used as a Calls-in- Queue alarm button indicates only two alarm threshold levels—either with a flash or steady lighting.
  • Page 440 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Feature Interactions Auto Answer All A calling group member with an analog multiline telephone can use Auto Answer All when an answering machine is connected to the extension.
  • Page 441 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Caller ID Caller ID information appears on the display. Outgoing call information is not displayed. Calling party number information is sent from one system to another if PRI tandem trunks directly connect the systems.
  • Page 442 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Coverage A calling group cannot be a sender. A calling group member , however, (continued) can be a sender for Individual Coverage (Primary or Secondary) or Group Coverage.
  • Page 443 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Display Calling group agents with MLX display telephones see feedback messages on the display when they log into the Available state. When a calling group supervisor with an MLX display telephone logs calling group members in or out, a message appears on the supervisor’s display and on the group member’s display.
  • Page 444 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Messaging Users can leave messages for the calling group only if the system has been programmed with a calling group message-waiting receiver. The receiver also receives fax message-waiting indications directed to the calling group.
  • Page 445 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Pools Lines/trunks assigned to pools can be assigned to ring into a calling group. An incoming call on a line/trunk assigned to the pool rings on an SA button, even if the calling group member has a Pool button assigned to his or her telephone.
  • Page 446 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling SMDR In Release 4.2 and later systems, the programmable SMDR TALK (continued) field (factory setting is off) records the time agents spend talking to incoming callers;...
  • Page 447 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Group Calling Transfer A call transferred to a calling group is not returned to the originator but is handled as any other call received in the calling group. For example, the system follows the same hunt sequence to locate an available calling group member, and the call is eligible for a delay announcement if one is programmed.

  • Page 448: Headset Options

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Headset Options Headset Options At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones MLX telephones Programming Codes Headset Hang Up *781 (centralized telephone programming only; not applicable for QCC) Headset Status *782...
  • Page 449 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Headset Options The user or operator presses the Headset Hang Up button to disconnect a headset call. The button replaces switchhook operation, which is disabled when headset operation is active. For a user or operator to be able to use a headset, a Headset Hang Up button must be programmed (centralized telephone programming) for an MLX telephone or MLX DLC.
  • Page 450 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Headset Options Two conditions are necessary for an MLX telephone user or MLX DLC operator to use the Headset Status feature: A Headset Hang Up button must be programmed, as described in the previous section.
  • Page 451 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Headset Options When the user or operator has a call on hold or is in the process of transferring a call or setting up a conference, Headset Auto Answer is also turned off. If the user or operator pressed the Conf, Hold, Direct Voice Mail (to transfer to voice mail), or Transfer button, he or she must press the Headset Auto Answer button to turn the feature back on before another call can be answered automatically.
  • Page 452 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Headset Options A headset user must manually select a line button (or Call button on the QCC) before making an inside or outside call. A user can press the Speaker button to move the call from the headset to the speakerphone.
  • Page 453 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Headset Options Headset operation on ETR and MLS telephones works the same as without the headset. For example, to make a call while using the headset, you must manually remove the receiver from its cradle to go off-hook.
  • Page 454 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Headset Options Park If a user or operator has a call parked, another call can be answered automatically by using Headset Auto Answer. Privacy Privacy should be programmed when headset users with Headset Auto Answer on have Shared SA buttons, or they share one or more personal lines.

  • Page 455: Hold

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Hold Hold At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Operator Information, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones Feature Codes Hold Hold Release System Programming Change hold disconnect interval: More LinesTrunks...
  • Page 456 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Hold An outside caller on hold hears Music-On-Hold, if programmed, or silence. If a call on hold is not picked up within a set length of time, the person who put the call on hold hears a reminder: a beep for a telephone user, an abbreviated ring for a system operator.
  • Page 457 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Hold QCC Hold Return. Determines what happens to a call that a QCC operator has put on hold and that has not been picked up after the operator hold timer has expired twice.
  • Page 458 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Hold Telephone Differences Direct-Line Consoles When DLC operator automatic Hold is enabled, the DLC operator can put an active call on hold by pressing another line button or DSS button. How Hold works depends on the type of call and its appearance on the telephone: When one-touch Hold is programmed systemwide and the operator is active on a Personal Line, pressing an Auto Dial button or DSS button also...
  • Page 459 If a single-line telephone user with a call on hold hangs up, the call rings back at the extension. NOTE: Some single-line telephones, such as Lucent Technologies models 2500YMGL, 2500MMGK, and 8110M, use a timed or positive disconnect. On these telephones, pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. Use the Recall or Flash button instead of the switchhook to send a switchhook flash.
  • Page 460 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Hold Feature Interactions Allowed/ The Hold button is used to enter a wild card character in an Allowed or Disallowed Lists Disallowed List entry. Authorization Code Initiating the Hold feature after entering an authorization code deactivates the Authorization Code feature for subsequent calls.
  • Page 461 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Hold Digital Data Calls Data calls cannot be put on hold. 2B data video calls require both B-channels at a video workstation. Directories The Hold button is used to enter the Pause special character in a telephone number programmed as a listing for a System Directory, Extension Directory, or Personal Directory.
  • Page 462 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Hold Personal Lines and The hold timer or operator hold timer applies to a call on hold for transfer. Pickup The user or operator hears a reminder (a beep or abbreviated ring) after the timer expires.
  • Page 463 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Hold Transfer Calls on hold for transfer are timed so that a user or system operator hears a reminder after the timer expires. In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold at a Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be accessed by a user who has a personal line button for the call.

  • Page 464: Hotline

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features HotLine HotLine At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones Single-line telephones System Programming To assign a HotLine extension: More More Dial ext.
  • Page 465 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features HotLine Speed Dial code at the telephone. For security reasons, any subsequent changes must be made through centralized telephone programming. No further programming of any kind can be performed at the telephone. The Personal Speed Dial number used at a single-line telephone HotLine can be an inside extension number, an outside number including ARS or pool access codes (Hybrid/PBX mode only), a long-distance service access code, or an Idle...
  • Page 466 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features HotLine Many features cannot be used at HotLine extensions—for example, Last Number Dial, Saved Number Dial, Pickup, and Park. Features not normally available to single-line telephones (such as Do Not Disturb) are also not available to HotLine extensions.
  • Page 467 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features HotLine Forward and To remove Forward/Follow Me and Remote Call Forwarding at a Hotline Follow Me extension, you must use a telephone at a non-HotLine extension and (continued) follow these steps: 1.

  • Page 468: Idle Line Preference

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Idle Line Preference Idle Line Preference ‘‘Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference’’ on page...

  • Page 469: Inside Dial Tone

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Inside Dial Tone Inside Dial Tone At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones System Programming Options InsideDial Factory Setting Inside dial tone Description The system’s inside dial tone is heard when a user lifts the handset or presses the...

  • Page 470: Inspect

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Inspect Inspect At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Modes Telephones MLX display telephones Description Inspect allows an MLX display telephone user who is on a call to see call information about an incoming call that is ringing, alerting, or on hold.
  • Page 471 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Inspect If a user inspects a line that someone else is using, the display shows that the line is in use. If Inspect is activated and someone makes a voice-announced call or a group page to the user, the Inspect feature is canceled and the Home screen is displayed.
  • Page 472 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Inspect Direct Station Inspect can display limited information, such as extension number, label, Selector and number of messages, for each DSS button. To use Inspect, an operator presses the Page button for the range of extensions, then the Inspct button, and then the DSS button for an extension.

  • Page 473: Labeling

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Labeling Labeling At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Dial Plan, Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory, Group Coverage Information, Label Information, Operator Information, System Directory Modes Telephones Display telephones...
  • Page 474 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Labeling Description Through the use of the Labeling feature, the system manager can program the system to provide identification information (called labels ) and posted messages on display telephones.
  • Page 475 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Labeling Table 25. Factory-Set Posted Messages and Their Codes Number Message DO NOT DISTURB (not modifiable in Release 2.0 and later systems, modifiable in earlier releases) OUT TO LUNCH (modifiable) AT HOME (modifiable) OUT SICK (modifiable)
  • Page 476 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Labeling NOTE: The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or central office equipment. Programmed labels cannot be shown on nondisplay telephones or on single-line telephones.
  • Page 477 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Labeling Messaging The labels stored in the Extension Directory appear on MLX display telephones when users send each other messages. Messages include the name (the 7-character label) of the user who sent the message and the time and day the user called.

  • Page 478: Language Choice

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Language Choice Language Choice At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, system manager Reports Affected Extension Information, SMDR, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones MLX and ETR telephones Feature Codes English French...
  • Page 479 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Language Choice The system manager can program specific extensions or consecutive blocks of extensions in English, French, or Spanish as necessary. In addition, an individual MLX or ETR telephone user can choose the language most appropriate for his or her own extension.
  • Page 480 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Language Choice SMDR Report Language Through system programming, SMDR reports can be printed with headers in English, French, or Spanish, regardless of the language selected for the system or for SPM.
  • Page 481 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Language Choice spm -l french spm -l spanish Note that the option is a lowercase letter L, not the number 1. Use of the -l option changes the language attribute in the SPM configuration file.
  • Page 482 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Language Choice Time also appears in a 24-hour format on ETR telephones when French or Spanish has been chosen as the system language. Feature Interactions Alarm Clock and Enter the time settings for Alarm Clock and Reminder according to the Reminder Service language selection governing the extension.

  • Page 483: Last Number Dial

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Last Number Dial Last Number Dial At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Code Feature Code MLX Display Label LastNumDial [Last#]...
  • Page 484 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Last Number Dial Because the type of line button used to make the call (personal line, SA, or ICOM) is not stored, the user must select the appropriate line button before using Last Number Dial to redial a number.
  • Page 485 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Last Number Dial Other Multiline Telephones To redial a number using Last Number Dial on a multiline telephone, select the appropriate personal line (outside line) or SA button for the call. Then either press the programmed Last Number Dial button, or press the Feature button and dial 84.
  • Page 486 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Last Number Dial Microphone Disable When an MLX telephone user’s microphone is disabled, pressing the programmed Last Number Dial button before lifting the handset turns on the speakerphone so the user can hear the number being dialed.

  • Page 487: Line Request

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Line Request Line Request At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Modes Telephones All except MLC-5 cordless, MDC 9000, MDW 9000, QCC, and single-line telephones Description If a user wants to make a call on a busy outside line assigned to a button, Line Request notifies the user when the line becomes available.
  • Page 488 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Line Request Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode In Hybrid/PBX mode, Line Request can be used for personal lines or special-purpose lines (such as WATS) assigned to line buttons on a multiline telephone.

  • Page 489: Messaging

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging Messaging At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory, Extension Information, Label Information Modes Telephones Programming Codes Send/Remove Message *38 (Operator only) Leave Message...
  • Page 490 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging System Programming Change or add posted messages: More Labeling PostMessage Identify fax extension jacks, assign fax message-waiting receivers, specify length of time before system sends fax message-waiting indication: AuxEquip Msg Waiting...
  • Page 491 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging A Send/Remove Message button is a fixed button on a Queued Call Console (QCC) and cannot be reassigned. On a system with 29 or fewer lines, Send/ Remove Message is assigned by default to analog DLCs on button 34.
  • Page 492 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging Leave Message The Leave Message feature allows any user, including operators, to send messages to local system co-workers. For systems without a local voice messaging system (VMS), Leave Message works only with display telephones. For systems with a VMS, Leave Message works with display and non-display telephones that are subscribers to the VMS.
  • Page 493 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging NOTE: In Release 6.1 and later systems, if a user with a display telephone tries to send a message to a telephone that has coverage to Centralized Voice Messaging, no message is sent, but the display on the sender’s telephone reads that the message was sent.
  • Page 494 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging Table 26. Receiving Messages Functions Display Telephone Action Analog Function (including QCC) Multiline Read Press the Menu Press the Press the Press the message button and select Feature button Feature button Message...
  • Page 495 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging NOTES: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), a message- waiting receiver for a calling group must be a local user on the same system as the calling group.
  • Page 496 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging NOTES: If you press the Feature button and dial 54 on an MLS or analog multiline display telephone, you enter Message operation mode. You can then delete messages, receive messages, and perform other message operations.
  • Page 497 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging Posted Messages Users can post a message to provide special information to co-workers with display telephones—for example, to tell callers where the person is when not answering the telephone or why the person does not want to be disturbed.
  • Page 498 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging NOTE: The system can automatically post and remove messages for a non-display telephone only if a Posted Messages button has been programmed for that telephone. In Release 2.0 and later systems, when a user turns on the feature, the system automatically posts the message DO NOT DISTURB.
  • Page 499 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging If a fax message-waiting indication is deleted by one of the four message-waiting receivers, the message is deleted from all analog multiline and MLS display telephones programmed as message-waiting receivers for the fax, but the message is not deleted from MLX and ETR display telephones programmed as message-waiting receivers for the fax.
  • Page 500 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging Queued Call Consoles A Queued Call Console (QCC) operator can use Leave Message only by selecting the feature from the display. A QCC operator cannot cancel a sent message.
  • Page 501 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging Feature Interactions Barge-In If Barge-In is used to contact a user with a posted message, the caller’s telephone does not display that message. Centralized Voice A Leave Word Calling message cannot be sent to a non-local extension.
  • Page 502 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging Do Not Disturb In Release 2.0 and later systems, when Do Not Disturb is turned on, the system automatically posts DO NOT DISTURB, which appears both on the Home screen of an MLX display telephone user with the feature activated and on the screen of any inside display telephone user who calls that person.
  • Page 503 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Messaging Service Observing When a Service Observer observes an extension that has activated Do (continued) Not Disturb, the Service Observer does not receive the Do Not Disturb posted message.

  • Page 504: Microphone Disable

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Microphone Disable Microphone Disable At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Directory Modes Telephones All MLX (except QCC) System Programming Enable or disable individual MLX telephone microphones: More Extensions Mic Disable...
  • Page 505 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Microphone Disable If you press the Speaker button before lifting the handset, the system selects a line and you can dial a number. The microphone is muted, and you must lift the handset to speak to the person being called.

  • Page 506: Multi-Function Module

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Multi-Function Module Multi-Function Module At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, data users Reports Affected SMDR Modes Telephones MLX telephones except QCC Hardware Tip/ring interface WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK: Follow all warnings and cautions.
  • Page 507 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Multi-Function Module one for the MLX telephone and one for the device connected to the MFM. Both extension numbers are assigned to the jack, whether or not an MFM is connected. Because a separate extension number is assigned, features and line/trunk access can be assigned to the MFM independently of the MLX telephone.
  • Page 508 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Multi-Function Module and ringing options assigned to the MLX telephone should also be assigned to the MFM. In this arrangement, the MFM device does not ring when inside calls are received on an SA or ICOM button.
  • Page 509 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Multi-Function Module pool dial-out or ARS code in Hybrid/PBX mode. If ALS is set to select an outside line button before an SA or ICOM button, the device cannot be used to make inside calls (inside calls can be received only).
  • Page 510 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Multi-Function Module Calls are sent independently to the MLX telephone and its associated MFM. The following features can be employed when a user wants calls to be received at both the MLX telephone and the device connected to an MFM: Cover buttons Shared SA buttons...
  • Page 511 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Multi-Function Module Key and Behind Switch Modes When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned on and Automatic Line Selection is set to select an ICOM button, an outside line can be selected by dialing the Idle Line Access code (usually 9).
  • Page 512 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Multi-Function Module Conference The Conference feature cannot be used on the MFM because the system ignores the switchhook flash sent by the MFM. Coverage An MFM can be a sender or a receiver for Individual or Group Coverage. This allows an MLX telephone user to screen calls by using an answering machine connected to the MFM or to supplement ringing with an external alert connected to the MFM.
  • Page 513 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Multi-Function Module Recall/Timed Flash An MFM cannot send a timed flash. As a result, a single-line telephone or other device connected to an MFM cannot use Recall. Ringing Options At an MFM, lines that do not receive calls should be set to No Ring.

  • Page 514: Music-On-Hold

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Music-On-Hold Music-On-Hold At a Glance Reports Affected System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones System Programming Designate the Music-On-Hold extension jack: AuxEquip MusicOnHold Maximums 1 Music-On-Hold extension for each system Description Music-On-Hold can provide music or recorded information to an outside or private-network (Release 6.0 and later systems only) caller when the following...
  • Page 515 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Music-On-Hold NOTE: The information in Table 30 is for calls handled by the local MERLIN LEGEND System. For complete information about the operation of Music- On-Hold for private-network calls, refer to the Network Reference. Table 29.
  • Page 516 American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or ® Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). You can purchase a Magic On Hold system, which does not require such a license, from Lucent Technologies.
  • Page 517 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Music-On-Hold Feature Interactions Callback An outside caller waiting in the callback queue hears Music-On-Hold. Camp-On When Camp-On is used to complete the transfer of an outside call, the caller hears Music-On-Hold until the call is answered if the transfer audible is set to Music-On-Hold.

  • Page 518: Night Service

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service Night Service At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information, Night Service Information Modes Telephones Programming Code Feature Code MLX Display Label Night Srvc [Night] System Programming...
  • Page 519 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service Maximums Night Service groups 8 (one for each operator) Number of extensions in Unlimited except by system capacity Night Service group Number of outside lines in Unlimited except by system capacity (4.1 and later systems) Night Service group Calling group extension for...
  • Page 520 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service Night Service Group Assignment Each Night Service group is associated with either an individual QCC (in Hybrid/ PBX mode) or an individual DLC through system programming. A Night Service group can include the following types of members: Any type of extension One calling group (Release 2.0 and later) for each Night Service group...
  • Page 521 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service SECURITY ALERT: Avoid programming a remote access line as a destination for Night Service for any published telephone number. Professional toll-fraud criminals scan telephone directories for published local and 800 telephone numbers. Using these numbers, they attempt to gain access to the system, then may use such features as Remote Access to reach outside facilities from within the system.
  • Page 522 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service A Night Service Emergency Allowed List of emergency numbers can include up to 10 numbers, each with no more than 12 digits. Users who do not know the Night Service password can dial only the numbers on the list;...
  • Page 523 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service buttons at member extensions when Night Service operation begins. When Night Service goes off, the Coverage Control option automatically deactivates member extensions’ Coverage VMS Off buttons so that outside calls are no longer covered by voice mail.
  • Page 524 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service outside call, which is not allowed because of the Night Service restriction assigned to the extension. Operators can override Night Service with Time Set and turn Night Service on or off manually.
  • Page 525 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service Night Service button is not factory-assigned; instead, line 31 is assigned. The Night Service button is not a fixed feature and can be assigned to any available button on either an analog or MLX DLC.
  • Page 526 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service Feature Interactions Alarm A line/trunk jack programmed as a maintenance alarm port cannot be assigned to a Night Service group. Authorization Code An authorization code can be used when Night Service is activated. For Night Service with Outward Restriction, you must enter a valid password before entering an authorization code.
  • Page 527 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service Display If a system operator must enter a password to turn Night Service on and off, the display prompts the operator for the password. No message is displayed either when an operator activates Night Service by using a feature code or when Night Service is off.
  • Page 528 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Night Service Pickup By using Pickup, a user at another extension can answer a call ringing at a Night Service group extension. Primary Rate A PRI B-channel can be assigned to a Night Service group if the Routing Interface and T1 by Line Appearance option is assigned to the B-channel group.

  • Page 529: Notify

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Notify Notify ‘‘Signal/Notify’’ on page 645.

  • Page 530: Paging

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Paging Paging At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Dial Plan Information, Extension Information, Group Paging, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones Programming Code *22 + group or Page All ext.
  • Page 531 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Paging Speakerphone Paging An announcement made by using Speakerphone Paging is heard on telephones with built-in speakerphones (except single-line telephones with built-in speakerphones) or speakerphone adjuncts. Speakerphone Paging can be directed to an individual telephone, to groups, or to all speakerphones.
  • Page 532 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Paging NOTE: The system manager can program a QCC Call button to allow voice- announced calling, but a QCC cannot receive speakerphone pages. The system automatically reserves extension numbers 793 through 798 for the first six speakerphone paging groups.
  • Page 533 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Paging Loudspeaker Paging Loudspeaker Paging is used when a loudspeaker paging system is connected to the system on a line/trunk jack programmed for Loudspeaker Paging. Pages over a loudspeaker paging system are heard everywhere in the building or only in a particular area, depending on whether or not the loudspeaker system is a multizone paging system.
  • Page 534 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Paging A loudspeaker paging jack cannot be assigned to a pool that contains lines/trunks used to make or receive outgoing calls. When a line/trunk jack is assigned for Loudspeaker Paging, only the loudspeaker paging system can be connected.
  • Page 535 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Paging Cordless and Cordless/Wireless Telephones MLC-5, MDC 9000, and MDW 9000 telephones cannot be members of paging groups or receive speakerphone pages. Loudspeaker pages can be made from MLC-5 cordless telephones. All Other Multiline Telephones To receive pages, a multiline telephone must have Voice Announce on, which is the factory setting.
  • Page 536 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Paging To direct Speakerphone Paging to a group of extensions or to all extensions by using Page All, lift the handset. Then, while listening to inside dial tone, dial the extension number of the paging or Page All group, and speak into the handset.
  • Page 537 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Paging Do Not Disturb Speakerphone paging calls cannot be made to an extension with the Do Not Disturb feature activated. Forward and Calls cannot be forwarded to a paging group. The line/trunk number used Follow Me to connect loudspeaker paging equipment cannot be used to forward calls to outside telephone numbers.
  • Page 538 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Paging Transfer Calls cannot be transferred either to paging groups or the loudspeaker paging extension. UDP Features In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), loudspeaker and voice paging calls cannot be made to non-local dial plan extensions or paging groups.

  • Page 539: Park

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Park Park At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information, Operator Information, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones All except single-line Programming Codes Park at own extension Park Zone *22 + park zone (DLC operators only)
  • Page 540 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Park If a parked call is not picked up within the call park return interval (30–300 seconds; the factory setting is 180 seconds), the call returns to and rings at the extension that parked the call.
  • Page 541 NOTE: If a single-line telephone with a positive or timed disconnect is used—for example, the Lucent Technologies model 2500YMGL or 2500MMGK— pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. With this type of telephone, the Recall or Flash button, instead of the switchhook, must be used to park a call.
  • Page 542 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Park Feature Interactions Authorization Code Initiating Park after entering an authorization code deactivates the Authorization Code feature. An authorization code is not needed to pick up a parked call. Auto Dial An operator can program park zones on inside Auto Dial buttons.
  • Page 543 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Park Group Calling A calling group member who parks a call is considered available to receive another call. Headset Options If a call is parked, another call can be automatically answered by using Headset Auto Answer.

  • Page 544: Personal Lines

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personal Lines Personal Lines At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC System Programming Assign or remove personal lines: Extensions LinesTrunks Assign or remove principal user of a personal line:...
  • Page 545 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personal Lines Inside calls cannot be made or received on a personal line. When two or more users answer the same call on a Shared SA or personal line button, the red and green LEDs next to the button go on, but only one person has a talk path with the caller.
  • Page 546 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personal Lines If a line/trunk is not assigned as a personal line, grouped in a pool (Hybrid/PBX only), or assigned to ring into the Queued Call Console (QCC) queue, and a call is received on the line/trunk, the caller hears a ringback even if that line/trunk does not terminate anywhere in the system.
  • Page 547 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personal Lines Key and Behind Switch Modes When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned on and ALS is set for an ICOM button, a single-line user can select the personal line to make an outside call by dialing the Idle Line Access code (usually 9) while listening to inside dial tone.
  • Page 548 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personal Lines Allowed/ A user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension cannot dial a toll or Disallowed Lists outside number on a personal line button, unless the number is on an Allowed List assigned to the extension.
  • Page 549 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personal Lines CTI Link When a call is received on a personal line at an unmonitored DLC, caller information is passed on to destination extension or extensions that support screen pop, when the DLC operator conferences or transfers the call.
  • Page 550 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personal Lines Group Calling To allow all calling group members’ telephones to ring when an outside call (continued) is not answered within three rings, the lines/trunks programmed to ring into the queue also can be assigned as personal lines on group member telephones and programmed for Delay Ring.
  • Page 551 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personal Lines Pickup If a call received on a personal line is transferred to another user who receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and then puts the call on hold, another user who shares the personal line cannot select the shared personal line button to pick up the call.
  • Page 552 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personal Lines Transfer If a call is received on a personal line and is transferred to another user who receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and then puts the call on hold, another user who shares the personal line cannot select the shared personal line button and pick up the call.

  • Page 553: Personalized Ringing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Personalized Ringing Personalized Ringing ‘‘Ringing Options’’ on page 618.

  • Page 554: Pickup

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pickup Pickup At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information, Group Call Pickup Modes Telephones All (except MLC-5, which cannot be assigned to Pickup groups) Programming Codes Individual Pickup...

  • Page 555: Individual Pickup

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pickup Table 30. Types of Pickup – Individual Extension Line General Group Inside ringing Outside ringing Inside ringing Inside ringing Inside held Outside held Inside held Outside ringing Parked Outside ringing...
  • Page 556 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pickup Considerations and Constraints When Group Pickup is used to answer a call, the user cannot determine whose call is being answered. An MLX display telephone user receives call information and can determine whose call is answered only after the call is picked up.
  • Page 557 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pickup To answer calls on specific lines, press a programmed general-purpose Pickup button, or press the Feature button and dial 9; then dial the number of the line with the call.
  • Page 558 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pickup Coverage An Individual or Group Coverage sender or receiver can be a member of a Pickup group. This allows Pickup to be used to answer a ringing Individual or Group Coverage call.
  • Page 559 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pickup Personal Lines If a call received on a personal line is transferred to another user who receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and then puts the call on hold, another user who shares the personal line cannot select the shared personal line button to pick up the call.

  • Page 560: Pools

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pools Pools At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Dial Plan Information Modes Hybrid/PBX only Telephones System Programming Assign individual lines/trunks to pools: LinesTrunks Pools Assign Pool buttons to telephones:...
  • Page 561 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pools When the system is set up and the Hybrid/PBX mode of operation is selected, the system automatically groups lines/trunks into the following pools: All loop-start lines (basic and special-purpose) are assigned to the main pool.
  • Page 562 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pools Users must not be given dial access or Pool button access to pooled private trunks. To use these pools, users dial non-local dial plan extensions just as they would local extensions.
  • Page 563 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pools If remote users are going to use networked lines connected to your local system, the Remote Access feature is used to set them up. See ‘‘Remote Access’’...
  • Page 564 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pools Mode Differences Although pools are available only in Hybrid/PBX mode, users in Behind Switch mode can access the pools on the host system through their prime lines. Telephone Differences Direct-Line Consoles A Pool button cannot be assigned to a DLC.
  • Page 565 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pools Auto Dial Pool dial-out codes cannot be programmed on inside Auto Dial buttons. A pool dial-out code can be programmed on an outside Auto Dial button when a telephone number is also included.
  • Page 566 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Pools Group Calling Lines/trunks assigned to pools can be assigned to ring into a calling group. An incoming call on a line/trunk assigned to the pool rings on an SA button, even if the calling group member has a Pool button assigned to his or her telephone.

  • Page 567: Power-Failure Transfer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Power-Failure Transfer Power-Failure Transfer At a Glance Modes Telephones Single-line telephones Hardware If ground-start trunks are used in Hybrid/PBX mode, KS23566, L1 ground-start buttons are required on power- failure telephones.
  • Page 568 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Power-Failure Transfer Telephone Differences Multiline Telephones Multiline telephones cannot be used as power-failure telephones. Single-Line Telephones Touch-tone single-line telephones must be connected to PFT line/trunk jacks for touch-tone lines;...

  • Page 569: Primary Rate Interface (Pri) And T1

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected DS1 Information, PRI Information, SMDR Modes Key, Hybrid/PBX Telephones...
  • Page 570 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Assign test line telephone number for each 100D module: LinesTrunks Test TelNum Set timer and counter thresholds for each 100D module: LinesTrunks Protocol Timers...
  • Page 571 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Maximums General 100D modules PRI-specific B-channels Lines (total) Digits for each number assigned to a PRI line ISDN lines for each B-channel group B-channels for each B-channel group...
  • Page 572 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Factory Settings Systemwide Primary Clock First port that is in service on an 800 NI-BRI module or first 100D module in service in control unit Clock Synchronization Loop (not definable by system manager) Source...
  • Page 573 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Factory Settings Timer/counter thresholds for each 100D module 1 second (range 1,000–3,000 ms) T200 Timer 30 seconds (range 1–60) T203 Timer 3 transmissions (range 1–5) N200 Counter 260 octets (range 16–260)
  • Page 574 Northern Telecom DMS-100 Generic BCS 34 You also can link a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 4.0 or later with a Lucent Technologies DEFINITY ECS or DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions systems for data tie-trunk connections. In Release 6.0 and later systems, PRI B-channels, T1-emulated tie voice...
  • Page 575 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Terminology Called Party Number (CdPN) In general, the term Called Party Number (CdPN) is a telephone number that has been dialed to reach a destination. While routing the call, however, the network can change the Called Party Number to make routing easier.
  • Page 576 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 PRI is a common configuration for a DS1 facility. A DS1 facility consists of 24 channels, sometimes referred to as DS0 channels, each with a capacity of 64 kbps.
  • Page 577 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Trunks: Line 801 Loop-start Ground-start Line 802 Line 803 OUTGOING LINE Line 804 IS SELECTABLE BY USER Line 849 B-CHANNEL Line 850 B-channels GROUP...
  • Page 578 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Speed. Data calls to outside destinations can be established on the same B-channels used for voice calls if the service allows. Dedicated, conditioned lines/trunks are not needed.
  • Page 579 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 NOTE: The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or service provider. Blocking Caller ID is possible system-wide by accessing the PRI Lines menu.
  • Page 580 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 A DS1 facility programmed as a T1 line/trunk uses 24 channels, sometimes referred to as DS0 channels , each with a capacity of 64 kbps. Signaling must be in-band signaling, however, which limits the data rate for each channel to 56 kbps when the channels are programmed for Switched 56.
  • Page 581 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 — A T1 line’s far-end disconnect signal provides a reliable indication when a call ends, and a new call cannot be initiated until the line has been released from the prior call on both ends.
  • Page 582 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Both ends of the DS1 facility must be able to communicate. To ensure this, the following options are set during system programming to match the transmission of the outside DS1 facility: Type of service (T1 or PRI) Framing format...
  • Page 583 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 eliminates the need to have separate incoming and outgoing lines/trunks when these services are chosen. In Release 4.2 and later systems, when PRI is selected as the type of service, any combination of the following MCI and local exchange carrier services are supported, in addition to the AT&T services supported in prior releases: MCI services include:...
  • Page 584 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 They act as tandem tie trunks. If the type of service desired is PRI, tandem PRI trunks can perform the same function. (See ‘‘Tandem PRI Trunks’’...
  • Page 585 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 ZCS line coding monitors each DS0 channel and prevents strings of eight or more zeros. Upon detecting eight consecutive zeros in a channel octet, ZCS line coding forcibly changes the seventh zero (the second least significant bit) to a one.
  • Page 586 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 interrupting service and provide diagnostic and testing capabilities as well as B8ZS line coding. They can be programmed remotely or onsite, using menus. The lower-cost 551 T1 L1 CSU does not provide the B8ZS line coding required for 64-kbps data (clear channel signaling support) and for maintenance features, nor does it provide diagnostic and testing capabilities for the DS1 facility.
  • Page 587 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 NOTE: If you have a 100D module with an apparatus code of 517M15 or later, common-channel signaling is not an option for T1. ESF framing should be used because of its improved maintenance, diagnostic, and testing capabilities.
  • Page 588 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 networked system is in the 415 area code, calls made from the local system to the 415 area code can be routed through the remote system. This can mean considerable toll savings.
  • Page 589 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 NOTE: DEFINITY ECS and DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions features and operations are beyond the scope of this guide. For information about these systems, consult their documentation.
  • Page 590 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Network Services Supported This option specifies the type of network service provided by each B-channel group. The choices are as follows: AT&T toll services: —...
  • Page 591 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 telephone number to send is assigned to each PRI line in the B-channel group or when no telephone number is to be sent to the network. (This can be used to block outgoing Caller ID, systemwide.) NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), where the...
  • Page 592 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 T303 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the system sends a setup message to initiate an outgoing call. T305 Timer.
  • Page 593 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Incoming Outgoing call call (SA) (SA) (DPT) (SA) (PL) (PL) POOL B-Channel Group Foreign Exchange Where: ARS = Automatic Route Selection DPR = Dial Plan Routing Table NS = Network Selection Table CBC = Call-by-Call Services Table...
  • Page 594 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Routing by Dial Plan (Hybrid/PBX Only). Routing by dial plan is similar in concept to Direct Inward Dial (DID). It provides the ability to direct a call automatically to the proper destination for improved call distribution and call handling.
  • Page 595 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Table 32 is a sample Dial-Plan Routing Table. Note that in the sample table all incoming calls through the Megacom 800 service are delivered to an extension whose dial-plan number is 1234.
  • Page 596 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 the entry associated with 5552 is chosen as the best match. If the pattern is not programmed, it is considered a match with the number of digits in the pattern equal to 0.
  • Page 597 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Beginning with Release 3.0, hyphens are inserted between the digits on incoming calls (for example, 555-1234 for a 7-digit display and 123-555-1234 for a 10-digit display).
  • Page 598 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), where the Switch Type setting is LEGEND-Ntwk or LEGEND-PBX, outgoing calls on tandem PRI trunks are not routed using the features outlined in this section.
  • Page 599 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Table 33. Sample Network Selection Table Entry Number Pattern 101**** 10*** The Special Services Selection Table (see Table 34), lists prefixes that represent special services, such as operator service or international dialing (0 or 00).
  • Page 600 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 For each entry, the following can be specified: a set of patterns, the type of call, the service to use, and the number of digits to delete. Characteristics and valid entries for the Call-by-Call Services Table are as follows: By default, the patterns are blank, Call Type is Both, Service is blank, and Delete Digits is 0.
  • Page 601 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Call-by-call service selection closely resembles ARS in reducing costs and maximizing the benefits derived from limited resources. While ARS selects the most cost-effective route, call-by-call service selection selects the optimal service for that particular call.
  • Page 602 MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems or can connect one MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to another type of PBX (for instance, a Lucent Technologies DEFINITY G1.1 or DEFINITY ECS) or to the central office with digital (Switched 56 kbps) connections. In Release 6.0 and later...
  • Page 603 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Outgoing Only. Only outgoing calls can be made. Incoming Only. Calls can be received only. Trunk Seizure Type. The trunk seizure type can be one of four settings. The setting should be compatible with the signaling on the far end.
  • Page 604 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 T1 Routing by Dial Plan Beginning with Release 4.0, routing by dial plan is available on Switched 56 services offered on T1 connections. Service providers offer digit outpulsing for their T1 Switched 56 services.
  • Page 605 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Table 36. Sample T1 Switched 56 Dial-Plan Routing Table Entry 4... Service T1 S56 T1 S56 T1 S56 T1 S56 Expected Digits Example # Digit deletion...
  • Page 606 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only) with digital tandem trunks, a single clock source should be used for all systems in the network. Generally, the rules for assigning clock sources are the same as for single systems.
  • Page 607 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 If none of these is capable of providing the system clock, the communications system searches 800 NI-BRI and 100D modules for a clock source, starting from the first module in the system and ending with the last module.
  • Page 608 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 module in the control unit must be different from the numbers assigned to other channels in the same B-channel group and must be the same number as that supplied by the PRI service provider.
  • Page 609 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 In systems that are programmed using a non-uniform extension dialing plan, one base number may not be able to represent all telephones. To specify that no telephone number is sent to the network, choose the Do Not Copy Telephone Number programming option and use the Telephone Number to Send procedure to ensure that telephone numbers are not assigned to each...
  • Page 610 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Automatic Route If an incoming call matches the ARS access code, it is routed to the Selection extension programmed for unassigned DID calls. (continued) Barge-In Barge-In can be used on a PRI line.
  • Page 611 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Night Service A PRI B-channel can be assigned to a Night Service group (Release 4.1 and later systems only) if its B-channel group has been programmed for routing by line appearance.
  • Page 612 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Tandem Switching In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), PRI and T1 (emulated tie voice or data tie) facilities can be private tandem trunks. To provide the facility, customers order a point-to-point T1 circuit from a service provider and use system programming to set it up for PRI or T1.

  • Page 613: Privacy

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Privacy Privacy At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Directory Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Code Feature Codes MLX Display Label Privacy [Prvcy] Description...
  • Page 614 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Privacy Privacy is automatically on at data workstations, except for modem data-only workstations and for MLX voice and modem data stations, where Privacy can be activated as part of the dialing sequence. Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles A QCC operator cannot use Privacy.
  • Page 615 Features Privacy NOTE: Some single-line telephones, such as Lucent Technologies models 2500YMGL and 2500MMGK, use a positive or timed disconnect. On these telephones, pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. You must use the Recall or Flash button instead of the switchhook when turning Privacy on or off.
  • Page 616 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Privacy Signal/Notify Users can program and use a Signaling button to contact a co-worker who has turned on Privacy. System Access/ If Privacy is turned on at an extension with a Shared SA button, other Intercom Buttons users, including the principal extension, cannot join a call on that button.

  • Page 617: Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Programming Programming At a Glance Users Affected System managers Modes Telephones SECURITY ALERT: Remote System Programming. As a customer of a new communications system, you should be aware that telephone toll fraud is an increasing problem.
  • Page 618 Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 619 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Programming System Programming Initial system programming is performed when the system is planned and installed. The system can be reprogrammed as needs change. Like centralized telephone programming, you can program the system either from the system programming console or by using SPM software.

  • Page 620: System Programming Console Overlay

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Programming Call and Fixed-Feature Buttons Button Labeling Card Display Buttons Direct Station Selector Handset Display Screen (DSS) Home More Menu Inspct MLX-20L Volume Feature Transfer HFAI Conf PQRS WXYZ...
  • Page 621 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Programming Direct Station Selector One or two DSSs can be used with the MLX-20L telephone. Each DSS adds 50 buttons to the system programming console. For more information about the DSS, ‘‘Direct Station Selector’’...
  • Page 622 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Programming Line buttons (represented in the lower portion of the display). To use SPM for system programming, you must connect the PC to the control unit. This can be done either directly through the system programming jack on the control unit or through a modem (modems can be used for either on-site or remote programming).
  • Page 623 (*10) Remote programming allows technicians to run diagnostic tests and to display information needed to maintain the system. It is also used by Lucent Technologies technical support organizations for installation and maintenance support.
  • Page 624 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Programming Centralized Telephone Programming Centralized telephone programming allows the system manager to program, from a single location, any feature that can be programmed by individual extension users or system operators.

  • Page 625: Queued Call Console (Qcc)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Queued Call Console (QCC) At a Glance Users Affected QCC operators Reports Affected Operator Information, System information (SysSet-up) Mode Hybrid/PBX Telephones MLX-20L telephones System Programming Assign or remove a QCC position: Operator...
  • Page 626 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Select automatic or manual extended call completion for all QCC operators: Operator Queued Call ExtndComplt Designate calling group as QCC position-busy backup: More Operator Queued Call...
  • Page 627 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) 0 (no reprioritization) (range 5–30 sec, 0) Elevate Priority Remain on Hold QCC Hold Return Automatic Release QCC Hold Release Disabled Calls-in-Queue Alert 0 (no alert) (range 1–99 calls, 0) Queue Over Threshold Automatic...
  • Page 628 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) QCC Operation Call Delivery Outside calls designated through system programming to ring at a QCC are sent by the system to a single common QCC queue , where they wait to be sent to a QCC operator console.
  • Page 629 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) The operator is programming a Personal Directory listing or the Alarm Clock. The console is not plugged in. Extending Calls To direct an active call to another extension or to an outside number by using a QCC, press either the Start button or a DSS button.
  • Page 630 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) NOTE: When the system is programmed for automatic completion, an operator can still split and complete the call manually by first pressing the Start button, then using the dialpad or a Directory feature to dial the destination, and pressing the Release or Join button.
  • Page 631 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) The 7-line, 24-character display also provides a QCC operator with descriptive information about incoming and outgoing calls. This information includes the extension numbers and any programmed labels (such as names), the line/trunk identifiers, the reasons for call return and redirection, and the number of unanswered calls waiting in the queue.
  • Page 632 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Table 38. QCC Buttons — Continued Button Description Release Releases the QCC operator from a call and/or completes call direction, making the operator available for another call. Cancel Cancels call direction and reconnects the QCC operator with the caller (source).
  • Page 633 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Table 38. QCC Buttons — Continued Button Description Position Temporarily takes the QCC out of service. When the console Busy is in the position-busy state, the green LED next to the button is on and the position does not receive calls from the QCC queue.
  • Page 634 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) When a QCC receiving calls is in the position-busy state, any incoming calls (except for forwarded calls and calls directed to that console’s extension) are directed to other available QCCs that are programmed to receive calls on the line/ trunk.
  • Page 635 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) The following types of calls are assigned only a queue priority level. They cannot be directed to an individual QCC because they are always made to a specific operator position by the caller: Calls signed in (Follow Me) or forwarded to a QCC operator.
  • Page 636 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Programming an operator to receive DID calls to invalid destinations (unassigned extension numbers) does not cause the calls to ring into the QCC queue, unless the QCC queue is also programmed as the backup extension.
  • Page 637 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Extended Call Completion The setting for the Extended Call Completion option determines whether or not the process of directing calls (also known as extending calls) is completed automatically when a QCC operator with a DSS presses a DSS button.
  • Page 638 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Calls to unassigned (invalid) extensions received on DID or dial-in tie trunks or made by remote access users. The factory setting is that no message center position is assigned and that returning calls are returned to the originating operator position (the initiator), which, by definition, is a QCC queue when the system has QCCs.
  • Page 639 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) When the QCC Hold Return option is set for calls to remain on hold indefinitely, a QCC operator hears an abbreviated ring every time the interval expires. If the QCC Hold Return option is set for calls to return to the queue, each call on hold at a QCC operator console is timed individually (a queue return timer is used for each Call button).
  • Page 640 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) enters or leaves the queue. When the number of calls is equal to or greater than the programmed threshold, the queue indicator is highlighted and QCC operators who are on a call hear a tone.
  • Page 641 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) QCCs have no programmable buttons (all features are factory-assigned) and cannot use feature codes. If a QCC operator receives a call and another user joins the call by using a shared personal line or Shared SA button, the QCC operator can press the Start button to begin the direction process and then press the Join button to connect all three parties in a conference call.
  • Page 642 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Feature Interactions Account Code Entry A QCC operator can use Account Code Entry only by selecting the feature from the display, not by using the feature code. Normally, account codes cannot be entered when a Group Coverage call is answered at a Cover button programmed on a multiline telephone.
  • Page 643 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Camp-On A QCC operator can release a call to a busy extension either by selecting Camp On from the display or by pressing the Release button. If Camp-On is used, the call does not return to the QCC queue until the Camp-On return interval expires.
  • Page 644 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Coverage When the QCC queue is programmed as a receiver for a coverage group (continued) and a call transferred to a group member is not answered, the call returns to the queue as a transfer return if the QCC return ring interval is shorter than the coverage delay.
  • Page 645 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Display Features not assigned to buttons on the QCC can be activated only by selecting them from the display. A QCC operator also uses the display for call information, such as the person or extension calling, the line/trunk identifiers, the reasons for call return and redirection, and the number of calls waiting in the queue.
  • Page 646 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Group Calling If a QCC operator switches out of Position Busy while a backup call is in (continued) the calling group queue or has already been delivered to a calling group member, the call does not go back into the QCC queue.
  • Page 647 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Night Service In Release 4.1 and later systems, Night Service lines must be assigned to (continued) a Night Service group; they need not appear at the operator position for the group.
  • Page 648 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Pools Pool buttons cannot be assigned to a QCC, but a QCC operator can select pools to make outgoing calls by pressing a Call button and dialing the ARS or pool dial-out code.
  • Page 649 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Signal/Notify Notify and Signal buttons cannot be used on a QCC. However, pressing a DSS button sends a signal to the extension associated with the DSS button in the following instances: A QCC operator is timed out from dial tone on a Call button or has pressed the Forced Release button while listening to dial tone on a...

  • Page 650: Recall/Timed Flash

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Recall/Timed Flash Recall/Timed Flash At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Codes Recall *775 Conference...
  • Page 651 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Recall/Timed Flash A multiline telephone user can use Recall to access host features. The user can be connected to another party or can be listening to outside dial tone, ringback, or a busy signal.
  • Page 652 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Recall/Timed Flash Considerations and Constraints Recall can be used to send a timed flash to the host switch only on loop-start lines. The Recall or Flash button sends a switchhook flash. It is not a “redial” button. Mode Differences NOTE: There are no fixed Drop buttons on ETR and MLS telephones.
  • Page 653 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Recall/Timed Flash telephones, using either extension programming or centralized telephone programming. In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, Recall cannot be used on any outside call made or received on an ICOM button.
  • Page 654 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Recall/Timed Flash Single-Line Telephones A single-line telephone user without a Recall or Flash button must use the switchhook to send a timed flash. The communications system intercepts the signal;...
  • Page 655 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Recall/Timed Flash Automatic Route In Release 2.0 and later systems, Recall can be used on an ARS call. Selection Recall cannot be used during dialing. When dialing is complete, pressing the Recall button sends a timed flash to the host, the accessed line is kept, the user hears outside dial tone, and calling restrictions are reapplied.
  • Page 656 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Recall/Timed Flash Display When an MLX or ETR telephone user presses a programmed Recall button while on an outside line, the line information is redisplayed just as if the user had gone off hook on the line.
  • Page 657 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Recall/Timed Flash System Access/ Recall can be used on a ringing or answered inside call made on an SA or Intercom Buttons ICOM button. The call is disconnected and the user hears dial tone. When the user is listening to a busy signal, Recall has no effect.

  • Page 658: Reminder Service

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Reminder Service Reminder Service At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Codes Cancel **81 Missed Reminder...
  • Page 659 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Reminder Service service is available for all telephone users, the Alarm Clock feature for display telephones is easier to use and more effective for most purposes. (See ‘‘Alarm Clock’’...
  • Page 660 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Reminder Service Missed reminders can be canceled only by an operator. A missed reminder stays on the system until canceled. If a time for a reminder is already set, it is shown on display telephones when the Reminder button is pressed.
  • Page 661 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Reminder Service In Release 1.0 systems, the time is entered in 12-hour format in the range from 0100 to 1259 and either 2 (A) for a.m. or 7 (P) for p.m. To cancel a reminder, the user either presses a programmed Reminder Cancel button, or presses the Feature button and dials *81.

  • Page 662: Remote Access

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access Remote Access At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Remote Access (DISA) Information, SMDR Modes Telephones Touch-tone only System Programming Assign dedicated or shared remote access to lines/trunks: LinesTrunks RemoteAccss...
  • Page 663 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access Factory Settings ARS FRL for Barrier Codes or Lines/Trunks Autoqueuing Disabled Restriction for Barrier Outward-Restricted Codes or Lines/Trunks Maintenance/Programming In Release 3.0 and later systems, there is no default barrier Barrier Code code.
  • Page 664 Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 665 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access Whether or not the dialed digits are correct, an inter-digit time-out occurs during the first attempt. The system processes only the valid number of digits. So if a hacker enters four digits and the length is four digits, he or she hears dial tone.
  • Page 666 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access Remote access also allows remote system programming and maintenance. Specific outside lines/trunks (ground-start, loop-start, emulated ground-start or loop-start) are programmed for either dedicated or shared remote access. When dedicated remote access is programmed for a line/trunk, all incoming calls on that line/trunk are treated as remote access calls.
  • Page 667 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access Lines and Trunks Remote access calls are treated differently, depending on the type of line/trunk and how it is routed. Line. Loop-start, ground-start, emulated loop-start, emulated ground-start, BRI, and PRI B-channels programmed for line-appearance routing can be set for remote access use, dedicated or shared.
  • Page 668 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode), a remote access user from one system can reach Remote Access on a networked remote system by using a DID trunk, tandem trunk, a PRI B-channel with dial-plan routing, T1-emulated DID trunk, or dial-in tie trunk.
  • Page 669 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access Table 39. Remote Access Routing — Continued Facility Remote Access Routing Facility User Dials Programming Non-local PRI tandem trunk; T1- Programmed Default COR settings for tie dial plan emulated tie, T1- extension...
  • Page 670 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access NOTE: The steps below describe a normal remote access call. In Release 6.0 and later systems, an ARS remote access call is dialed just as any other ARS call is dialed.
  • Page 671 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access of restriction is assigned to each barrier code. If barrier codes are not used, the class of restriction settings are assigned to all non-tie trunks or to all tie trunks, or both.
  • Page 672 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access Disallowed List Assignment. Assigns Disallowed Lists; use when remote access users are not restricted from making local and/or toll calls. When a Disallowed List is assigned, remote users cannot dial the specific numbers included on the list.
  • Page 673 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access If a remote caller does not dial a number or feature code before the time-out period expires, the call goes to the redirect destination programmed for remote access.
  • Page 674 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access Allowed/ In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), for private Disallowed Lists trunks that will be used by remote networked users to access network trunks via ARS, default COR programming is used.
  • Page 675 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access Forward and To forward calls to an extension, dial *33 while listening to system dial Follow Me tone. Then dial the forwarding extension number and the destination (continued) extension number.
  • Page 676 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Remote Access SMDR Remote access calls are recorded only if SMDR is programmed to track incoming calls. If a barrier code is entered, the barrier code number (01–16) appears in the ACCOUNT field of the report, preceded by 999999.

  • Page 677: Ringing Line Preference

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Ringing Line Preference Ringing Line Preference ‘‘Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference’’ on page...

  • Page 678: Ringing Options

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Ringing Options Ringing Options At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information, System Information ( SysSet-up Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Codes (centralized telephone programming only for single-line Ring Timing Options...
  • Page 679 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Ringing Options Factory Settings Ring Timing Option (all Immediate Ring buttons) Delay Ring Interval 2 rings (range 1–6 rings) Send Ring Enabled Abbreviated Ring 1 (pattern numbers 1–8) Personalized Ringing Pattern Description...
  • Page 680 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Ringing Options In Release 4.0 and prior systems, when a sender has both Individual and Group Coverage and an Individual Coverage receiver is available, the programmed systemwide Delay Ring Interval of one to six rings provides a delay, in addition to the systemwide Coverage Delay Interval, before calls go to Group Coverage.
  • Page 681 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Ringing Options Personalized Ringing Options Personalized Ringing options allow a user to select one of eight different ringing patterns for his or her telephone, making it easier to distinguish its ring from those of other telephones.
  • Page 682 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Ringing Options The personalized ringing pattern selected for each extension is not shown on system programming reports. Delay Ring is especially useful on a Cover button because it gives the sender a chance to answer before the call rings at the receiver’s telephone.
  • Page 683 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Ringing Options Feature Interactions Auto Answer All A General Purpose Adapter (GPA) connected to an analog multiline telephone answers calls on lines set for Immediate or Delay Ring. Program lines that are not to be answered for No Ring.
  • Page 684 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Ringing Options Fax Extension The Fax Extension feature overrides the distinctive ringing pattern for calls transferred to a fax extension. When a fax extension receives a transferred call, the fax extension provides one long ring (similar to an inside call) instead of three short rings.
  • Page 685 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Ringing Options Reminder Service A reminder call overrides programmed Ring Timing options (Delay Ring and No Ring) and rings with a priority ring at an SA or ICOM button. Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, when a Service Observer is observing an extension and a call comes to the Service Observer’s extension, he or...

  • Page 686: Saved Number Dial

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Saved Number Dial Saved Number Dial At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Directory Modes Telephones All except QCC and single-line telephones Programming Code MLX Display Label SaveNumDial [Save#]...
  • Page 687 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Saved Number Dial When using Saved Number Dial on an analog multiline telephone connected to a General Purpose Adapter (GPA) in Auto mode, lift the handset before activating the feature.
  • Page 688 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Saved Number Dial Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles Saved Number Dial cannot be used on a QCC. Other Multiline Telephones On a multiline telephone, to save a number using Saved Number Dial, press the programmed Saved Number Dial button before hanging up.
  • Page 689 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Saved Number Dial Display When a user presses a programmed Saved Number Dial button, the digits appear on the display as though dialed from the dialpad. HotLine Saved Number Dial is not available at HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later systems).

  • Page 690: Second Dial Tone Timer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Second Dial Tone Timer Second Dial Tone Timer At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones System Programming More Options SecDTDelay Ring Delay Ring...
  • Page 691 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Second Dial Tone Timer Considerations and Constraints Contact your central office to determine whether there is a delay before second dial tone is returned. If calls are misrouted and dropped when special services requiring second dial tone are used, consider adjusting the second dial tone timer interval.

  • Page 692: Service Observing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing Service Observing At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users Reports Affected Service Observing, Extension Information Modes Telephones Service Observer Extension Observed Extensions All except QCC and CTI Link Programming Codes Service Observing *59 (Centralized Telephone Programming)
  • Page 693 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing A call can be observed by only one Service Observer at one time No more than two internal parties can be on the call. The following calls cannot be observed: Data call Video call...
  • Page 694 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing Table 41. Error Tones — Continued Service Audible Observing Observer Enters Feedback Active Display Valid Extension Busy None Already Observed Valid Extension Confirmation Green None 3 Internal Parties Steady...
  • Page 695 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing Another extension bridges onto the call, thus making the total of local switch extensions more than two. The Service Observer station uses headset hang-up. NOTE: When a Service Observer begins to observe an idle extension, but the extension makes or receives a call before the Service Observer’s SA button...
  • Page 696 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing When the observed party takes a call off Hold. When the observed party conferences in another party. For each Service Observing group that is programmed through Centralized Telephone Programming, a warning tone can be programmed to be on or off.
  • Page 697 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing A Service Observer cannot activate Service Observing while in the following modes: Programming Feature (if the telephone is off-hook) Test Administration Maintenance Extension Directory A Service observer cannot activate Service Observing while setting the Alarm Clock or the Timer on the MLX telephone.
  • Page 698 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing Telephone Differences Direct-Line Console (DLC) A DLC can be a Service Observer and can be a member of a Service Observing group. Queued Call Console (QCC) Service Observing cannot be programmed on a QCC.
  • Page 699 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing Auto Dial Service Observers can use Inside Auto Dial and DSS buttons to select extensions they want to observe. If an observed extension uses one-touch Transfer (automatic or manual), the observer is removed from the call when the call is placed on Hold for the transfer.
  • Page 700 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing Conference Service Observing follows the MERLIN LEGEND limitations for calls, (continued) namely that no more than three internal extensions can be on one call, regardless if it is an outside or inside call.
  • Page 701 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing Do Not Disturb A Service Observer can observe calls even if the observed extension uses the Do Not Disturb feature. Activating Do Not Disturb at a Service Observer extension does not block the Service Observer from being alerted when a call comes into an observed extension.
  • Page 702 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing Hold Service Observers cannot place observed calls on Hold. If a person at an observed extension presses Hold, the call is removed from the Service Observer until the call is re-accessed, at which point the Service Observer is re-connected to the call (if the extension is still being observed).
  • Page 703 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing Pickup When an extension answers a call by using Pickup, the call can be observed. Pools If an extension uses Dial Access to make a call, the call can be observed. A call placed or answered on a Pool button can be observed.
  • Page 704 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Service Observing System Access/ A Service Observer who pre-selects an SA button can establish a Service Shared System Observing session when he or she goes off-hook. Access Buttons A Service Observer can be off-hook on an SA Originate Only, SA Ring/ (continued)

  • Page 705: Signal/Notify

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Signal/Notify Signal/Notify At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension information Modes Telephones All except QCC and single-line telephones Programming Codes Signal *23 + ext. no. Notify, Send *757 + ext.
  • Page 706 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Signal/Notify Notify Notify allows a multiline telephone user to light an LED on another telephone. To use this feature, a Send button must be programmed at the sender’s telephone and a Receive button must be programmed at the receiver’s telephone.
  • Page 707 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Signal/Notify Single-Line Telephones Neither Signal nor Notify can be used on single-line telephones. Feature Interactions Auto Dial A Signal button and an Auto Dial button cannot be programmed for the same extension.

  • Page 708: Speed Dial

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Speed Dial Speed Dial At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information, System Directory Modes Telephones System Speed Dial All except QCC Personal Speed Dial Multiline telephones with ten or fewer buttons, single-line telephones, data equipment...
  • Page 709 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Speed Dial In Hybrid/PBX mode, numbers can include pool dial-out codes or the ARS code. When dial-out codes are included, Pause characters may be required immediately following the dial-out code to allow time to receive the telephone company dial tone.
  • Page 710 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Speed Dial area codes. In Hybrid/PBX mode, a Personal Speed Dial number also can include pool dial-out codes or the ARS code. When dial-out codes are included, Pause characters may be required immediately following the dial-out code to allow time to receive the telephone company dial tone.
  • Page 711 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial can be used at digital data and modem-only workstations, but must be programmed through centralized telephone programming. On multiline telephones, line buttons can be programmed with individual System Speed Dial codes.
  • Page 712 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Speed Dial Queued Call Consoles Personal Speed Dial and System Speed Dial cannot be used to dial numbers on a QCC. Directory features can be used instead. Other Multiline Telephones System Speed Dial To dial a System Speed Dial number, press a System Speed Dial button...
  • Page 713 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Speed Dial Feature Interactions Account Code Entry A System Speed Dial number or a Personal Speed Dial number can be programmed to replace a long account number, but it cannot be programmed to contain both an account number and a telephone number.
  • Page 714 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Speed Dial HotLine A HotLine extension (Release 5.0 and later systems) can dial only the first Personal Speed Dial number (code 01) programmed for the extension. The end-of-dialing digit, #, should be programmed at the end of the speed dial number.

  • Page 715: Station Message Detail Recording (Smdr)

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users, system manager Reports Affected System Information (SysSet-up) Modes System Programming Select types of outside calls recorded:...
  • Page 716 They can be printed on a serial printer connected to the SMDR jack. To assist further with cost allocation and unauthorized call detection, a Lucent Technologies Call Accounting System (CAS Plus V3, CAS for Windows, CAT/B, or CAT/H) can be connected to the SMDR jack on the control unit.
  • Page 717 In Release 4.2 and later systems, the SMDR feature includes enhancements to support sales and customer service calling groups; these improvements are outlined in this topic. They are designed to allow use of the Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Reporter software application, which assists in determining the...
  • Page 718 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) DATE TIME CALLED NUMBER DUR. LINE STN. ACCOUNT TALK 10/27/97 09:59 00:00:30 4118 123456 10/27/97 10:00 00:15:57 4114 129345 15:51 10/27/97 10:00 00:05:31 4116...
  • Page 719 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) I indicates either an incoming voice call with ANI or Caller ID information, or a data call on a PRI or other facility equipped to receive the caller’s number.
  • Page 720 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) When any other incoming call was answered, regardless of the Talk time status. When an outgoing call was originated. (The system detected end of dialing.) CALLED NUMBER (Column 4) Depending upon the type of line used for a call and whether it provides caller...
  • Page 721 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) CALL TAG (Column 5) This section describes the symbols that appear in call records, in order of precedence. The last topic in this section explains conditions under which the field is left blank.
  • Page 722 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) The incoming call was answered elsewhere in the system and then disconnected. The call was answered by the QCC overflow receiver for the calling group. The call was transferred without consultation to an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group member who answered the call.
  • Page 723 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) In Release 4.1 and prior systems, Column 6 displays the duration of an incoming call. Timing starts when the call is answered and ends when the call is disconnected.
  • Page 724 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) If the incoming call was a successful remote access call, either the 2-digit barrier code ID number (01–16) preceded by six consecutive 9s, or 99999900, indicating that no barrier code was required, overridden only when an account code was subsequently entered.
  • Page 725 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) out of paper, or if a paper jam occurs. Up to 100 SMDR records can be queued. SMDR records generated after maximum capacity is exceeded may be lost because only the newest 100 records are retained.
  • Page 726 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) In Release 4.2 and later systems with Talk Time enabled, for incoming calls to an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group, an ampersand (&) in the SMDR report CALL TAG field indicates that an Auto Login or Auto Logout overflow calling group member answered the call.
  • Page 727 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) In Release 4.2 and later systems with Talk Time enabled and the QCC queue assigned as the overflow receiver for an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group, a caller may disconnect while waiting in the QCC queue.
  • Page 728 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Basic Rate Interface The number of a BRI line is shown in the LINE field of the SMDR report. Call timing begins when an outgoing call is answered. Therefore, calls that are unanswered at the far end do not have an SMDR call record.
  • Page 729 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Forward and In Release 6.0 and later systems, when a call comes into an extension Follow Me belonging to a principal user and with Centrex Transfer via Remote Call (continued) Forwarding activated, the initial incoming call may be of very short duration.
  • Page 730 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Group Calling In Release 6.1 and later systems, if a UDP or PSTN call must traverse a (continued) tie trunk to reach the auto login and auto logout DGC group, the call will treated as if it originated on the PSTN and the queue and talk time will be recorded.
  • Page 731 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Recall/Timed Flash If a multiline telephone user presses the Recall button to get a new dial tone, SMDR timing stops for the previous call and begins for a new call. Remote Access Remote access calls are recorded only if SMDR is programmed to track incoming calls.
  • Page 732 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) UDP Features In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), any calls originating on a tandem trunk appear on the SMDR report, as do any calls originating on or passing through the local system.

  • Page 733: System Access/Intercom Buttons

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons System Access/Intercom Buttons At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes SA buttons Hybrid/PBX ICOM buttons Key and Behind Switch Telephones All except QCC...
  • Page 734 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Factory Settings Button Assignments by Hybrid/PBX Mode 1 SA Ring Direct-Line Consoles 1 SA Voice Other Multiline 1 SA Ring Telephones and MFMs 1 SA Voice 1 SA Originate Only Single-Line Telephones...
  • Page 735 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons cannot be made to single-line telephones, a call made on this button to a single-line telephone is a ringing call, even if the single-line telephone has a speakerphone.
  • Page 736 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons When Do Not Disturb is turned on at the principal extension, calls do not ring at that extension or at other telephones with Shared SA buttons for that extension. The principal extension or an SSA button can be used to join a conversation in progress.
  • Page 737 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Originate Only. Used only to make inside calls. Calls are not received on this button. Its purpose is to ensure that a user always has a button available to make or transfer calls, establish conference calls, answer call-waiting calls, or pick up parked calls.
  • Page 738 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons SSA buttons cannot be assigned to a single-line telephone. A single-line telephone cannot be the principal extension for a Shared SA button unless the telephone is connected to an MFM.
  • Page 739 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Single-Line Telephones In Hybrid/PBX mode, each single-line telephone (or other device connected to an 016 (T/R), 012 (T/R), or 008 OPT module; or to a port programmed as tip/ring on a 412 LS-ID-ETR or 016 ETR module) is automatically assigned two SA Ring buttons and one SA Originate Only button.
  • Page 740 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Automatic Route When a call is made on a Shared SA button, the ARS FRL that applies is Selection the level programmed for the telephone with the button, not the level for the principal extension.
  • Page 741 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Coverage If a receiver has a Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, or Group Cover (continued) button for a sender and also has a Shared SA button associated with the sender, the green LEDs next to both the Cover button and the Shared SA button flash when a call arrives for the sender.
  • Page 742 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Hold In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold at a (continued) Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be picked up by a user who has a personal line button for the call.
  • Page 743 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Pickup An inside call ringing at an SA or SSA button can be answered at another telephone. All associated SA or SSA buttons are cleared. Primary Rate T1 lines must not be shared between voice and data extensions with Interface and T1...
  • Page 744 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Service Observing If a Service Observer goes off-hook on a non-SA button, he or she can (continued) post-select to an SA button and establish a Service Observing session. If a Service Observer post-selects while observing an extension, he or she is disconnected from the call.

  • Page 745: System Renumbering

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering System Renumbering At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected ARS, Dial Plan, Extension Directory, Extension Information, Group Paging, Operator Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information Modes Telephones...
  • Page 746 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only) where local users will dial extensions on a remote networked system, UDP procedures are used to number these extensions so that local users can reach these extensions as though they were on the local system.
  • Page 747 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering example, if extension numbers 1, 2, 30, and 40 are assigned to telephones, those numbers cannot be used as the first number in longer extension numbers such as 10, 200, 302, or 4052.
  • Page 748 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering Operator Console (not flexible) 0 Extensions 10–19 Extensions 20–29 Extensions 30–39 Extensions 40–49 Extensions 50–59 Extensions Extra Extensions Extra MFMs/ Terminal Adapters 60–66 6700–6842 6843–6849 6850–6992 6993–6999...
  • Page 749 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering Additional extension jacks are shown in Figure 33 as Extra Extensions (6700– 6842), and additional MFMs are shown as Extra Adjuncts (6850–6992). If extra extensions are assigned, the extension numbers for extra adjuncts are assigned by the system to MFM adjuncts.
  • Page 750 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering Operator Console (not flexible) 0 Extensions 101–199 Extensions 200–299 MLX Adjuncts 300–399 MLX Adjuncts 400–499 500–599 600–699 Main Pool Calling Groups Paging Groups 71–76 770–791, 7920–7929 793–799 Lines/Trunks...
  • Page 751 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering NOTES: The extension numbers are reserved, whether or not adjuncts are connected to MLX telephones. If you renumber the extension number of an MLX telephone, the system does not automatically change the extension number of the associated adjunct.
  • Page 752 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering NOTES: The extension numbers are reserved whether or not adjuncts are connected to MLX telephones. If you renumber the extension number of an MLX telephone, the system does not automatically change the extension number of the associated adjunct.
  • Page 753 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering Single Renumbering can be used to assign a specified extension number to the following: extensions, adjuncts, lines/trunks, telephones, ARS access code, calling groups, Idle Line access code, LDN, paging groups, park zones, pools, and remote access code.
  • Page 754 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering systems, however, when you are renumbering a line/trunk, the line is forced idle during the renumbering process. In Release 1.0 systems, when the system manager uses single renumbering to assign a specified extension number, the system is forced idle during the renumbering process.
  • Page 755 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering starting with the highest extension number should be assigned to Page 3. You cannot program individual buttons on a DSS. Operator park zones must be included in the extension number range specified for one of the Page buttons.
  • Page 756 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering Considerations and Constraints Extensions do not need to be renumbered in the following cases: The default 2-digit extension numbers are acceptable. No special extension numbers are needed. There are fewer than 50 extensions in the system.
  • Page 757 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features System Renumbering Group Calling Extensions for calling groups (factory settings 770–791 and 7920–7929) are assigned and can be renumbered through system renumbering. Ringing/Idle Line In Key and Behind Switch modes, the Idle Line Access code (factory Preference setting is 9) can be renumbered.

  • Page 758: Timed Flash

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Timed Flash Timed Flash ‘‘Recall/Timed Flash’’ on page 590.

  • Page 759: Tandem Switching

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching Tandem Switching At a Glance Users Affected Reports Affected General Trunk Information, Extension Information Modes Hybrid/PBX Telephones System Programming Specify the switch type for a PRI tandem trunk connected to a slot in the control unit: Dial slot no.
  • Page 760 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching Factory Settings Switch Identifier No value; facility not networked PRI Tandem Trunks Electronic Tandem Network (ETN) Network Service Route directly to UDP Routing Copy Copy Telephone No.
  • Page 761 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching Remote access settings to allow network routing Feature interactions with line/trunk features such as pools and PRI ‘‘Uniform Dial Plan Features’’ on page 741 describes how the system is set up and used for one aspect of private networks: non-local dial plan extensions, including the following topics:...
  • Page 762 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching Shared Applications. Networked systems should have their own local voice mail and/or auto attendant applications as well as their own external alerts and Music-On-Hold sources. A single Auto Attendant, however, can distribute calls throughout the network.
  • Page 763 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching A MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is always identified by a number between 1 and 40, whereas DEFINITY ECS or DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions systems are identified by numbers between 41 and 60. A switch identifier should be unique across a network.
  • Page 764 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching where the calls are connected to the public switched telephone network. It includes the following two topics: Local Calls Routed to Other Systems. This topic explains the factors that you must consider when you set up your local system so that your users can make ARS calls via public switched telephone network trunks connected to another networked system.
  • Page 765 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching For detailed information on modifying ARS in order to allow calling out on PSTN facilities connected to a non-local system in a network, refer to the Network Reference .
  • Page 766 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching At the system where calls originate, set up the subpatterns for the table. In doing so, you may wish to check with the non-local system manager to ensure that the local system routes associated with the primary time period (sub-pattern A) take advantage of non-local system routes associated with the secondary time period (sub-pattern B).
  • Page 767 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching SYS PROGRAM LINES/TRUNK REMOTE ACCESS NONTIE/ TIELINES RESTRICTIONS When programming the default COR, change the Calling Restriction option to unrestricted (the factory setting is outward restricted). You should assign Disallowed List 7 to include;...
  • Page 768 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching The following general steps outline the procedures: Do not assign the private trunks for remote networked users to remote access. Set the options listed below for the remote access default COR on your system.
  • Page 769 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching numbers included on the list. When barrier codes are required for the default COR, Disallowed Lists should be assigned to individual barrier codes. Modify ARS as required. Using the example outlined earlier, a remote user might dial the 617 area code preceded by a 1.
  • Page 770 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching Callback If a caller attempts Selective Callback upon hearing a busy tone and the (continued) busy condition is not derived from the originating system, Selective Callback has no effect.
  • Page 771 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Tandem Switching Primary Rate Interface In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), PRI and T1 (PRI) and T1 (emulated tie voice or data tie) facilities can be private tandem trunks. To provide the facility, customers order a point-to-point T1 circuit from a service provider and use system programming to set it up for PRI or T1, but the provider only supplies amplification, not switching services.

  • Page 772: Timer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Timer Timer At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected None Modes Telephones MLX display and analog multiline telephone users MLX Display Label Timer [Timer] Description Each MLX telephone and analog multiline display telephone has a timer to time calls, meetings, breaks, or other events.
  • Page 773 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Timer When finished timing, press the Stop button. The timer stops counting. Press Time/Timer to return to normal display. NOTE: If timing a call, the timer does not stop automatically when the call is completed.

  • Page 774: Toll Type

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Toll Type Toll Type At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected General Trunk Information Modes Telephone System Programming Designate whether or not a toll prefix is required: LinesTrunks Toll Type Factory Setting...
  • Page 775 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Toll Type Feature Interactions Automatic Route In certain areas, the local telephone company requires dialing the prefix 1 Selection for certain exchanges. In these cases, the exchanges can be assigned to a 1 + 7 ARS table, and the 1 + 7 Dial setting must be set to Within Area Code.

  • Page 776: Touch-Tone Or Rotary Signaling

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected DID Trunk Information, GS/LS Trunk Information, System Information (SysSet-up), Tie Trunk Information Modes Telephones System Programming...
  • Page 777 Remote Access Account Code Entry Authorization Codes IS II/III AUDIX Voice Power IS II/III Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IS III Fax Attendant MERLIN Mail MERLIN LEGEND Mail Messaging 2000 Enhanced Service Center (ESC) Lucent Technologies Attendant Intuity CONVERSANT Intuity AUDIX...
  • Page 778 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Message-Waiting light updating for Centralized Voice Messaging when the updating codes are sent over tandem tie or T1-emulated tandem tie trunks (Release 6.1 or later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only) NOTE: When Messaging-Waiting light updates are sent over PRI tandem trunks, no TTRs are needed.
  • Page 779 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Table 43. System Requirements for TTRs TTRs Required Calls per Hour No Account Codes Used Account Codes Used If one or more voice messaging systems are used, additional TTRs are needed (see Table 44).
  • Page 780 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Table 45. TTRs Required for Primary Delay Announcement Devices When Using Prompt-Based Overflow No. of Devices No. of TTRs Required 8 or more Table 46.
  • Page 781 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling end and the receiving end. If the systems in the private network are connected by PRI trunks, no additional TTRs are needed. Calculate the number of TTRs required by the voice messaging system(s) (see Table...
  • Page 782 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling changed for individual rotary trunks so that touch-tone signals are converted to rotary pulses for transmission to the central office. Rotary signaling can be set for Delay or No Delay. Delay is the factory setting; it makes the rotary pulse inaudible to the telephone user and delays sending the dialed number from the control unit to the line/trunk until the user is finished dialing.

  • Page 783: Transfer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Transfer At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Operator Information, SMDR, System Information (SysSet-up) Modes Telephones Programming Code *774 (Behind Switch mode only) MLX Display Label Transfer [Trans] System Programming...
  • Page 784 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Factory Settings Transfer Return Time 4 rings (range 1–9 rings, 0 = disabled) One-Touch Hold or Transfer Key and Hybrid/PBX: One-Touch Transfer with Automatic Completion; Behind Switch: One-Touch Hold One-Touch Transfer Automatic Completion Type of Transfer...
  • Page 785 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer NOTE: QCC system operators ordinarily use the Start and Release buttons to transfer calls rather than the transfer process described in this section. For more information, see ‘‘Queued Call Console (QCC)’’...
  • Page 786 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer NOTES: A call transferred to an extension programmed as a fax extension does not return to the originator, but continues to ring at the fax extension. This eliminates the possibility of a high-pitched fax tone being heard by the person who answers the returning call.
  • Page 787 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Manual Completion. One-touch Transfer with manual completion allows a transfer with consultation; the user can delay completing the transfer until the destination extension is answered. The originator completes the transfer by pressing the Transfer button or another line button, or by hanging up.
  • Page 788 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer for a free SA or ICOM button, or select an outside line button to transfer a call to an outside number. The following types of calls ring at the destination to which they are transferred, regardless of the programmed type of Transfer: Calls that arrive after waiting in a callback or call-waiting queue Calls to busy extensions that do not have the ability to receive Voice...
  • Page 789 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer transfers. Extensions that should not be restricted must be individually programmed to allow trunk-to-trunk transfer. Users can transfer inside or outside calls either to inside extensions or to outside numbers.
  • Page 790 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer NOTE: QCC system operators ordinarily use the Start and Release buttons to transfer calls rather than the transfer process described in this section. For more information, see ‘‘Queued Call Console (QCC)’’...
  • Page 791 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Except when one-touch Hold is used, a transferred call always arrives on an SA or ICOM button or, when transferred to a QCC operator, on a Call button. Calls cannot be transferred from an extension programmed for a fax machine, but inside and outside calls can be transferred to a fax machine.
  • Page 792 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer each multiline telephone through either extension programming or centralized telephone programming, and then can be used only when transferring within the local system (this option is not available in Hybrid/PBX or Key mode). One-touch Hold is the factory setting in Behind Switch mode.
  • Page 793 The call is transferred. If a single-line telephone with positive or timed disconnect is used—for example, Lucent Technologies models 2500YMGL and 2500MMGK—pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. With this type of telephone, the Recall button must be used instead of the switchhook to transfer a call.
  • Page 794 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Caller ID on Line 1 of the second screen. (The call must be from an area where call (continued) identification is supported.) Caller ID information is displayed when a call returns from transfer because the extension to which the call was transferred is either busy or not answering.
  • Page 795 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Digital Data Calls Data calls cannot be transferred. 2B data video calls require both B-channels at a video workstation. Direct Station DSS buttons can be used to transfer outside calls using one-touch Hold Selector only by a DLC operator;...
  • Page 796 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Do Not Disturb If a call is transferred to an extension that has Do Not Disturb on and that has neither forwarding on nor coverage receivers, the call immediately returns to the transfer originator.
  • Page 797 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Hold In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold at a (continued) Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be accessed by a user who has a personal line button for the call.
  • Page 798 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Paging Calls cannot be transferred either to paging groups or the loudspeaker paging extension. Park A user can park calls by pressing the Transfer button and dialing his or her own extension.
  • Page 799 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer Service Observing If the Service Observer is observing the extension that originally made the (continued) call, the Service Observer remains on the call when the transfer is completed.
  • Page 800 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Transfer UDP Features In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), transfers of outside or non-local dial plan calls to non-local dial plan extensions are actually trunk-to-trunk transfers.

  • Page 801: Uniform Dial Plan Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Uniform Dial Plan Features At a Glance Users Affected Reports Affected Non-Local Dial Plan, Extension Information Modes Hybrid/PBX Telephones System Programming Assign extension number ranges for non-local dial plan extensions: Dial no.
  • Page 802 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Specify voice, data, or both for an identified UDP route (use for routes with pools of PRI or T1 facilities): Dial pattern no. Tables UDP Routing Enter...
  • Page 803 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Description In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems can be networked with one another, or with DEFINITY ECS or DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions systems, in private networks.
  • Page 804 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features network. When users call one another, the system searches the local dial plan; if the extension number is not found, it consults the non-local dial plan and associated routing information in order to send the call directly or indirectly to another system in the network.
  • Page 805 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features to the non-local dial plans made by network system managers be made at the same time. System managers should provide ranges wide enough to avoid problems for future non-local dial plan changes.
  • Page 806 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Choose one of the following techniques, depending upon the actual extension numbers you are entering in ranges and potential conflicts: Specify ranges in MERLIN LEGEND that include the first four digits in the extension numbers.
  • Page 807 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features The call is put through speedily. It may go through more than one system before it is completed. For example, if a user on System A calls Extension 4551, the non-local dial plan may send the call to System B.
  • Page 808 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Considerations and Constraints Calls to a non-local dial plan extension are treated as outside calls for the purpose of conferencing. Each non-local conference participant who is added takes up one of the two outside calls permitted in a conference.
  • Page 809 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features A QCC Pool Status button shows activity on private network trunk pools as well as on other trunk pools. A call from a non-local dial plan extension over tandem tie trunks is prioritized as an outside call to the QCC and treated as an outside call for the purpose of the Join function.
  • Page 810 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Callback Callback queuing works for lines/trunks connected to the caller’s local system, including private network tandem trunks. When a call is sent across the network and a non-local extension or system’s trunks are busy, the caller cannot queue the call using Callback.
  • Page 811 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Coverage Non-local UDP calls are treated as outside calls by the system and by Selective Coverage features: Coverage Off, Coverage Inside, and Coverage VMS Off.
  • Page 812 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features CTI Link any other caller. Users at CTI-linked PassageWay Telephony Services (continued) extensions must use the telephones at their extensions to make transfers to non-local dial plan extensions or to add conferees to a conference.
  • Page 813 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Group Calling Private-networked trunks cannot be programmed to ring into calling groups because tandem trunks are dial-in facilities. When a calling group extension number is included in the non-local dial plan, you can dial the group just as you would any other extension.
  • Page 814 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Music-On-Hold Music-On-Hold sources cannot be shared by networked systems. Calls between systems in a private network are treated as outside calls; for this reason, callers hear Music-On-Hold as though they were outside callers.
  • Page 815 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Reminder Service Reminder Service does not function across a private network. Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, calls coming across a private network can be observed just like outside calls.
  • Page 816 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Local users can make the types of calls listed below, regardless of system programming for trunk-to-trunk transfers: A call on a private network trunk transferred to a non-local dial plan extension.

  • Page 817: Voice Announce

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Voice Announce Voice Announce At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Directory, Extension Information Modes Telephones All telephones with speakerphones Programming Codes Receive On Receive Off **10...
  • Page 818 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Voice Announce Beginning in Release 7.0, Voice Announce on Idle Only is available for MLX telephones. This further enhancement to the Voice Announce feature allows you to receive voice announcements only when you are not active on another call.
  • Page 819 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Voice Announce QCCs in the system. Inspecting this button displays Call 5 Voice if Voice Announce for QCCs is enabled and Call 5 Ring if Voice Announce for QCCs is not enabled.
  • Page 820 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features Voice Announce Announce has not been turned off, the cordless telephone beeps. The user can then answer the call using the handset. Single-Line Telephones Single-line telephone users cannot make or receive voice announcements, even if the set has a speakerphone.

  • Page 821: Customer Support Information

    In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-tree customer Helpline (1-800-628-2888) 24 hours a day. If you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, call the Helpline or your Lucent Technologies representative. Consultation charges may apply. Outside the USA, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, contact your Lucent Technologies representative.

  • Page 822: Canadian Department Of Communications (Doc) Interference Information

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
  • Page 823 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information FCC Notification and Repair Information • If the system provides both manual and automatic selection of incoming/outgoing access to the network, report the number AS593M-72682-MF-E. •...

  • Page 824: Installation And Operational Procedures

    FCC. In the event repairs are needed on this equipment, contact your authorized Lucent Technologies dealer or, in the USA only, contact the National Service Assistance Center (NSAC) at 1-800-628-2888.

  • Page 825: Doc Notification And Repair Information

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information DOC Notification and Repair Information This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the Public Switched Telephone Network. Permissible exceptions are when: —...

  • Page 826: Renseignements Sur La Notification Du Ministère Des Communications Du Canada Et La Réparation

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la Notification du Ministère des Communications du Canada Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected.
  • Page 827 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la Notification du Ministère des Communications du Canada suite de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à...

  • Page 828: Security Of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud MERLIN LEGEND D.O.C. Ministère des Communications Location Label Placement du Canada emplacement de l’étiquette Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud As a customer of a new telephone system, you should be aware that there is an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud.
  • Page 829 Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

  • Page 830: Toll Fraud Prevention

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention A-10 Deactivate all unassigned codes promptly. Ensure that Remote Access users are aware of their responsibility to keep the telephone number and any access codes secure. When possible, restrict the off-network capability of off-premises callers, using calling restrictions, Facility Restriction Levels (Hybrid/PBX mode only), and Disallowed List capabilities.
  • Page 831 In any event, it is not advisable to give anyone access to network facilities or operators, or to dial a number at the request of the caller. Any time a call appears to be suspicious, call the Lucent Technologies BCS Fraud Intervention Center at 1-800-628-2888 (fraud intervention for ®...
  • Page 832 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention A-12 Security Risks Associated with Transferring through Voice Messaging Systems Toll fraud hackers try to dial into a voice mailbox and then execute a transfer by dialing *T.
  • Page 833 1809, 1900, and 976 or 1 (wildcard) 976. In Release 3.1 and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800, 1800, 411, and 1411, but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. NOTE: Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.
  • Page 834 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention A-14 Security Risks Associated with the Automated Attendant Feature of Voice Messaging Systems Two areas of toll fraud risk associated with the Automated Attendant feature of voice messaging systems are: Pooled facility (line/trunk) access codes are translated to a menu prompt to allow Remote Access.
  • Page 835 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention A-15 facilities used for RCF to ground-start line/trunks. Usually, a charge applies for this change. Also, hardware and software changes may be necessary in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.

  • Page 836: Other Security Hints

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints A-16 If Remote Access is used, an upgrade to MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3.0 is encouraged to take advantage of the longer barrier code. Other Security Hints Make sure that the Automated Attendant selector codes do not permit outside line selection.
  • Page 837 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints A-17 Never discuss your telephone system’s numbering plan with anyone outside the company. Educating Operators Operators or attendants need to be especially aware of how to recognize and react to potential hacker activity.
  • Page 838 Change the access password regularly and issue it only to authorized personnel. Disconnect the maintenance port when not in use. (This however, eliminates Lucent Technologies’ 24-hour maintenance surveillance capability and may result in additional maintenance costs.) Create a communications system management policy concerning employee turnover and include these suggestions: —...
  • Page 839 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints A-19 Choosing Passwords Passwords should be the maximum length allowed by the system. Passwords should be hard to guess and should not contain: All the same numbers (for example, 1111, 666666).

  • Page 840: Limited Warranty And Limitation Of Liability

    Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order, Lucent Technologies will, without charge to you, repair or replace, at its option, the system components that are not in good working order. Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis.

  • Page 841: Remote Administration And Maintenance

    PURPOSE. Limitation of Liability Except as provided below, the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims, losses, damages, or expenses from any cause whatsoever (including acts or omissions of third parties), regardless of the form of action, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, shall not exceed the lesser of: (1) the direct damages proven;...
  • Page 842 A-22 Under applicable tariffs, you will be responsible for payment of toll charges. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit resulting from unauthorized access. To reduce the risk of unauthorized access through Remote Administration and...

  • Page 843: Features And Planning Forms

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms Features and Planning Forms This appendix contains an alphabetical list of the features that can be assigned to the system or system extensions and the planning forms associated with each feature.
  • Page 844 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms Table B-1. Alphabetical List of Features — Continued Feature Planning Forms 4h—ETR Telephone 4j—MLS Telephone 5a—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog 5b—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital 5c—MFM Adjunct: DLC 5d—Queued Call Console (QCC) 6e—Allowed Lists...
  • Page 845 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms Table B-1. Alphabetical List of Features — Continued Feature Planning Forms Callback 3a—Incoming Trunks: Remote Access 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone 4d—MLX Telephone 4e—MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f—Tip/Ring Equipment 4h—ETR Telephone 4j—MLS Telephone...
  • Page 846 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms Table B-1. Alphabetical List of Features — Continued Feature Planning Forms Coverage 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone 4d—MLX Telephone 4e—MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f—Tip/Ring Equipment 4h—ETR Telephone 4j—MLS Telephone 5a—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog...
  • Page 847 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms Table B-1. Alphabetical List of Features — Continued Feature Planning Forms Group Calling 2d—System Numbering: Special Renumbers 6e—Group Calling 6f—System Features 7a—Night Service: Group Assignment Data Form 2—Data Hunt Groups Headset Options 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone...
  • Page 848 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms Table B-1. Alphabetical List of Features — Continued Feature Planning Forms Messaging 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone (Message Waiting Receivers) 4d—MLX Telephone 4e—MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f —Tip/Ring Equipment 4h—ETR Telephone 4j—MLS Telephone...
  • Page 849 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms Table B-1. Alphabetical List of Features — Continued Feature Planning Forms Personal Lines 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone 4d—MLX Telephone 4e—MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f—Tip/Ring Equipment 4h—ETR Telephone 4j—MLS Telephone 5a—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog...
  • Page 850 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms Table B-1. Alphabetical List of Features — Continued Feature Planning Forms Queued Call Console 1—System Planning 2d—System Numbering: Special Renumbers 5d—Queued Call Console (QCC) 6a—Optional Operator Features 7c—Group Coverage 7d—Group Calling...
  • Page 851 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms Table B-1. Alphabetical List of Features — Continued Feature Planning Forms Touch-Tone or Rotary 2c—System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Signaling 3c—Incoming Trunks: Tie 3d—Incoming Trunks: DID 8a—System Features Transfer 1—System Planning...

  • Page 852: Feature Reference 555-670-110 April

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Features and Planning Forms B-10...

  • Page 853: System Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 System Features System Features This appendix provides an alphabetical list of systemwide features and outlines their availability by mode. Notes, where appropriate, briefly describe mode differences and specific release availability. For information about feature use on MLX, ETR, MLS, analog multiline, and single-line telephones, see Appendix ‘‘General Feature Use and Telephone...
  • Page 854 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 System Features Table C-1. Availability by Mode — Continued Hybrid/ Behind Feature Switch Notes Basic Rate Interface Release 4.0 and later Call-by-Call Service Selection Release 2.0 and later Call Waiting Callback Key and Behind Switch: not...
  • Page 855 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 System Features Table C-1. Availability by Mode — Continued Hybrid/ Behind Feature Switch Notes Direct Voice Mail Directories MLX only Direct Inward Dial (DID) Options Direct Voice Mail Release 3.0 and later DS1 Module Options Extension Status...
  • Page 856 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 System Features Table C-1. Availability by Mode — Continued Hybrid/ Behind Feature Switch Notes Paging Groups Park Pickup Groups Pools (trunk group) Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Release 2.0 and later Options Queued Call Console (QCC) Recall Interval (Recall/Timed...
  • Page 857 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 System Features Table C-1. Availability by Mode — Continued Hybrid/ Behind Feature Switch Notes T1 trunks Switched 56 data supported in Release 4.0 and later Tie Trunk Options Timed Flash (Recall/Timed Release 2.0 and later Flash)
  • Page 858 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 System Features...

  • Page 859: General Feature Use And Telephone Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information General Feature Use and Telephone Programming This appendix contains information on the general use of features for the MLX, ETR, MLS, analog multiline, and single-line telephones.
  • Page 860 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Programmed Buttons Any unlabeled line button on multiline telephones can be programmed with a feature for one-touch activation. See Table D-4 through Table D-8...

  • Page 861: Telephone And Operator Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features # on single-line telephones. Each of these methods sends a signal to the system that a feature code is about to be dialed. When the code is dialed, the feature is activated.
  • Page 862 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Account Code Entry 82 + code K P B K P B K P B Acct AccountCode Alarm K P B...
  • Page 863 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Call Waiting K P B K P B K P B K P B CWait CallWaiting **11...
  • Page 864 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Extension Status Direct-Line Console Status Off 760 + DSS K P B K P B *760 OPES, ESOff OperatorES,...
  • Page 865 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Forward and Follow Me K P B K P B K P B K P B Activate Forward (inside) 33 + ext.
  • Page 866 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Group Calling ln-Queue Alarm button *22 + calling K P B K P B K P B K P B GrpCl...
  • Page 867 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Intercom buttons Assign buttons ICOM (Default Ring) SysAccess ICOM Originate Only Change button type SysAcc-00 Ring Voice...
  • Page 868 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Night Service K P B K P B Night Night Srvc Notify K P B K P B K P B K P B...
  • Page 869 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Recall K P B K P B K P B K P B *775 Recll Recall Reminder Service...
  • Page 870 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Ringing Options RngOp RingOptions Individual lines K P B K P B K P B K P B 1Line One Line...
  • Page 871 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 System Access buttons Assign buttons SA (Default Ring) SysAccess SA Originate Only SysAcc-00 Shared SA *17 + primary ShareSysAcc ext.
  • Page 872 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-14 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature Prog Code Code...
  • Page 873 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-15 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 874 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-16 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 875 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-17 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 876 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-18 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 877 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-19 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 878 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-20 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 879 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Account Code Entry 82 + code K P B K P B Acct: Acct? Authorization Code K P B K P B Auth: Auth? Auto Dial...
  • Page 880 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Coverage K P B K P B Coverage Coverage Cover inside and outside Cover Inside On calls Cover outside calls only **48 Cover Inside Off Receiver buttons...
  • Page 881 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Forward and Follow Me K P B K P B Activate Forward (inside) 33 + ext. no. Forward Forward Remote Call Forward 33 + tel no.
  • Page 882 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Intercom buttons K P B K P B Assign buttons ICOM (Default Ring) SysAccess SysAccess ICOM Originate Only SysAcc-00 SysAcc-00 Change button type...
  • Page 883 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Notify K P B K P B Notify Send *757 + ext. no. Send Notify Send Receive *758 + ext. no. Receive notify Recv Paging...
  • Page 884 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Ringing Options K P B K P B RingOptions RingOptions Individual lines K P B K P B One Line Immediate ring K P B...
  • Page 885 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Voice Announce K P B K P B Voice Annce Voice Annce Receive; On RecvVoiceAnn On **10 Receive; Off RecvVoiceAnn Off 1 Centralized telephone programming only.

  • Page 886: Telephone Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-28 Telephone Programming The following describes how to program features on MLX, ETR, MLS, and analog multiline telephones. Because Personal Speed Dial is the only feature that single- line telephone users can program, general programming instructions for single- line telephones are not provided.
  • Page 887 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-29 Table D-4. Programming Analog Multiline Telephones Step Action Label the button. Remove the clear label cover from the telephone: insert the end of a paper clip in the notch at the top of the cover.
  • Page 888 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-30 Table D-5. Programming ETR and MLS Telephones Step Action Label the button. Remove the clear label cover from the telephone: pull up on the tab that extends from the top of the cover.
  • Page 889 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-31 Table D-6. Programming MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones Step Action Label the button. Remove the clear label cover from the telephone: pull up on the tab that extends from the top of the cover.
  • Page 890 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-32 Table D-7. Programming MLX Telephones by Using the Display Step Action Label the button to be programmed. Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by pulling up on the tab that extends from the top of the cover.
  • Page 891 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-33 Table D-7. Programming MLX Telephones by Using the Display — Continued Step Action Select the feature. If the feature name is on the display: Press the button next to or below the name of the feature to be programmed.
  • Page 892 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-34 Table D-8. Programming TransTalk MDC 9000 and MDW Telephones Step Action Label the button to be Remove the clear label cover from the telephone programmed.

  • Page 893: System Programming Menu Hierarchy

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 System Programming Menu Hierarchy System Programming Menu Hierarchy The system programming menu hierarchy details the sequence of menu screens that appear when you select the system programming options. The choice of an option on the first menu screen leads to either a second menu screen or a data- entry screen.
  • Page 894 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 System Programming Menu Hierarchy...

  • Page 895: Sample Reports

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Sample Reports This appendix includes samples of the print reports generated by the communications system. Table F-1 lists the system reports and the pages in this appendix where samples can be found.

  • Page 896: Automatic Route Selection

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Table F-1. Sample Report Pages — Continued For... See... Operator Information Report F-24 Allowed Lists Report F-26 Access to Allowed Lists Report F-27 Disallowed Lists Report F-28 Access to Disallowed Lists Report F-29...
  • Page 897 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports To access the menu options in Table F-2, select the Print option on the System Programming menu. Table F-2. System Reports Menu Option Report Name Description Prints each of the reports available on the Print menu, from SysSet-up to Error...
  • Page 898 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Table F-2. System Reports — Continued Menu Option Report Name Description Remote Access (DISA) Remote access dial code, class of Rmote Access Information restriction, barrier code information. Operator Information For each system operator position: logical Oper Info...
  • Page 899 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Table F-2. System Reports — Continued Menu Option Report Name Description Extension Directory Slot/port addresses, extensions, labels, and Ext Direct feature-related attributes. Column headings are printed on the first page only and are not carried over to subsequent pages.
  • Page 900 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Table F-2. System Reports — Continued Menu Option Report Name Description Night Service The operator, password required, time-of- Night Information day, and Emergency Allowed List extension Service numbers.

  • Page 901: System Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports System Information Report System Information Report Print Menu Option: SysSet-up SYSTEM INFORMATION Current Date: 01/04/00 Current Time: 00:21:15 System : Mode AutoMaintBusy AutoBusyTie Hybrid/PBX Disable Disable Language: SystemLang...
  • Page 902 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports System Information Report System Information Report— Continued Slot # 1: 008 MLX Slot # 2: Slot # 3: Slot # 4: Slot # 5: 800 GS/LS Slot # 6: 008 GS/LS-MLX Slot # 7:...

  • Page 903: Dial Plan Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Dial Plan Report Print Menu Option: Dial Plan Sections: Pools; Telephone Paging Zones; Direct Group Calling Group; Lines/Trunks; Stations DIAL PLAN FOR POOLS POOL.# POOL.# POOL.#...
  • Page 904 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report F-10 Dial Plan Report—Continued DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS STN #: OPERATR STN #: STN #: STN #: EXT 13 STN #: EXT 14 STN #: STN #: STN #:...
  • Page 905 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report F-11 Dial Plan Report—Continued COMPLETE DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS AND ADJUNCTS ID #: 4000 7300 ID #: 4001 7301 ID #: 4002 7302 ID #: 4003...

  • Page 906: Non-Local Dial Plan Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Non-Local Dial Plan Report F-12 Non-Local Dial Plan Report Print Menu Option: NonLcl UDP (Release 6.0 and later systems only) Sections: Ranges; Patterns Range Range Range Range 2400-2449...

  • Page 907: Label Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Label Information Report F-13 Label Information Report Print Menu Option: Labels Sections: Telephone Personal Directory; Posted Messages and Numbers LABEL INFORMATION Executive Telephone # Personal Directory Name Number Display...

  • Page 908: Tie Trunk Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Tie Trunk Information Report F-14 Tie Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: Trunk Info and TIE TIE TRUNK INFORMATION TRUNK Slot/Port : 14/ 1 TIE-PBX Direction: 2 Way E&M Signal: Type1S Dialtone...

  • Page 909: Did Trunk Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports DID Trunk Information Report F-15 DID Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: Trunk Info and DID TRUNK INFORMATION Trk SS/PP Blk DiscTime Type ExpDig DelDig AddDig Signal InvDest 841 13/ 1...

  • Page 910: Gs/Ls Trunk Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports GS/LS Trunk Information Report F-16 GS/LS Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: Trunk Info and Loop/Ground GS/LS TRUNK INFORMATION SS/PP Type OutMode RelDisc ChannelUnit LS-ID Delay 2/ 1 Loop TouchTone...

  • Page 911: General Trunk Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports General Trunk Information Report F-17 General Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: Trunk Info and General GENERAL TRUNK INFORMATION SS/PP RemAccess Pool TlPrfx HldDisc Principal Extern Prty Oper...

  • Page 912: Ds1 Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports DS1 Information Report F-18 DS1 Information Report Print Menu Option: T1 Info DS1 SLOT ATTRIBUTES Slot Type Format Supp Signal LineComp ClkSync Src Active Rob Bit Prim Loop Rob Bit...

  • Page 913: Pri Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports PRI Information Report F-19 PRI Information Report Print Menu Option: PRI Info Sections: Network Selection, Special Service, Call-by-Call and Dial Plan Routing Tables; PRI Information Slot 5 Switch: DMS-100 Slot 11...
  • Page 914 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports PRI Information Report F-20 PRI Information Report—Continued BchnlGrp #: Slot: TestTelNum: NtwkServ: Incoming Routing: ElecTandNtwkRoute Directly to UDP Channel ID: 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Line PhoneNumber...
  • Page 915 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports PRI Information Report F-21 PRI Information Report—Continued Network Selection Table Entry Number: Pattern to Match: 101**** 10*** Special Service Table Entry Number: Pattern to Match: none none OP/P...
  • Page 916 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports PRI Information Report F-22 PRI Information Report—Continued Pattern Call Type: BOTH BOTH BOTH BOTH BOTH NtwkServ: DMS-Private DMS-Private DeleteDigits: 0 Entry Number: 5 Call Type: BOTH BOTH BOTH...

  • Page 917: Remote Access (Disa) Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Remote Access (DISA) Information Report F-23 Remote Access (DISA) Information Report Print Menu Option: Rmote Access Sections: General Options; System Default Class of Restrictions (Non- TIE);...

  • Page 918: Operator Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Operator Information Report F-24 Operator Information Report Print Menu Option: Oper Info Sections: Operator Positions; General Options; DSS Options; QCC Operator Options: QCC Call Types OPERATOR POSITIONS PORT CALL ALERT...
  • Page 919 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Operator Information Report F-25 Operator Information Report— Continued QCC CALL TYPES: CALL TYPE PRIORITY OPERATORS ======================= ======== =================== Dial 0 Operator Follow Forward Unassigned DID Listed Directory Number Operator’s Extension Returning...

  • Page 920: Allowed Lists Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Allowed Lists Report F-26 Allowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: AllowList Sections: Lists 1 through 7 ALLOWED LISTS List : Entry 0: ------ Entry 1: ------ Entry 2: ------...

  • Page 921: Access To Allowed Lists Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Access to Allowed Lists Report F-27 Access to Allowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: AllowListTo ACCESS TO ALLOWED LISTS FOR REMOTE ACCESS 17 & 18 MEAN TIE & NON-TIE RESTRICTIONS List STNS RACC...

  • Page 922: Disallowed Lists Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Disallowed Lists Report F-28 Disallowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: DisallowLst Sections: Lists 1 through 7 DISALLOWED LISTS List : Entry 0: ------------ Entry 1: ------------ Entry 2: ------------...

  • Page 923: Access To Disallowed Lists Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Access to Disallowed Lists Report F-29 Access to Disallowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: DisallowTo ACCESS TO DISALLOWED LISTS FOR REMOTE ACCESS 17 & 18 MEAN TIE & NON-TIE RESTRICTIONS List STNS RACC...

  • Page 924: Automatic Route Selection Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Automatic Route Selection Report F-30 Automatic Route Selection Report Print Menu Option: Sections: Tables AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION ARS IS: ACTIVE ACCESS CODE: 9 TABLE 17: Default Toll Output Table Pool Absorb Other Digits...

  • Page 925: Extension Directory Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Extension Directory Report F-31 Extension Directory Report Print Menu Option: Ext Direct EXTENSION DIRECTORY Port Ext # Label F H R M V R A 2 Port Ext # Label...

  • Page 926: System Directory Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports System Directory Report F-32 System Directory Report Print Menu Option: Sys Direct SYSTEM DIRECTORY Code Name Number Display ABC Company 555-9999 Jacques Smith 5551212 Travel Agency 912015556677...

  • Page 927: Group Paging Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Group Paging Report F-33 Group Paging Report Print Menu Option: Group Page GROUP PAGING Group # STNS Group # STNS...

  • Page 928: Extension Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Extension Information Report F-34 Extension Information Report Print Menu Option: Ext Info plus extension number EXTENSION INFORMATION Extn SS/PP Type 1/ 1 MLX-20L + 1 DSS CTI Link : NO Alarms:...
  • Page 929 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Extension Information Report F-35 Extension Information Report— Continued EXTENSION INFORMATION Extn SS/PP Type 1/ 1 MLX-20L + 1 DSS Button Blank Status None Button Blank Status None Button Blank...

  • Page 930: Group Coverage Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Group Coverage Information Report F-36 Group Coverage Information Report Print Menu Option: GrpCoverage GROUP COVERAGE INFORMATION Group # Senders 6802 6804 Group # Senders 6810 DIRECT GROUP CALLING INFORMATION Group # : 770...

  • Page 931: Direct Group Calling Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Direct Group Calling Information Report F-37 Direct Group Calling Information Report Print Menu Option: Grp Calling Sections: Each programmed group DIRECT GROUP CALLING INFORMATION Group # : 782 Group Type : AutoLogout Call Distribution Type...
  • Page 932 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Direct Group Calling Information Report F-38 Direct Group Calling Information Report—Continued DIRECT GROUP CALLING INFORMATION Group Priority:16 Support Group: Home Group(s)/Priority:...

  • Page 933: Night Service Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Night Service Information Report F-39 Night Service Information Report Print Menu Option: Night Service NIGHT SERVICE INFORMATION OPERATOR DGCG STNS LINES OPERATOR DGCG STNS LINES OPERATOR DGCG STNS...

  • Page 934: Group Call Pickup Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Group Call Pickup Report F-40 Group Call Pickup Report Print Menu Option: Call Pickup GROUP CALL PICKUP Group # STNS Group # STNS Group # STNS Group # STNS...

  • Page 935: Error Log Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Error Log Report F-41 Error Log Report Print Menu Option: Error Log ERROR LOG Last 30 System Errors: Message ss/pp First Last Code PRI SVC AUDIT TIMEOUT 00/00 01/08 00:00:53 7001...

  • Page 936: Authorization Code Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Authorization Code Information Report F-42 Authorization Code Information Report Print Menu Option: Auth Code SMDR Option for the Account Code Field is Home Extension Extension Authorization Code 3124 1357921...

  • Page 937: Bri Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports BRI Information Report F-43 BRI Information Report Print Menu Option: BRI INFORMATION Flexible Timers: T200 = 1000 ms T203 = 33 sec T303 = 4 sec T305 = 30 sec T308 = 4 sec Fixed Timers and Counters: T202 = 2 sec T309 = 90 sec...

  • Page 938: Switch 56 Data Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Sample Reports Switch 56 Data Information Report F-44 Switch 56 Data Information Report Print Menu Option: Switch 56 Dial Plan Routing for Network Service Expected Digits: Digits to Delete: 0 Digits to Add: ss/pp Dirction...

  • Page 939: Button Diagrams

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams Button Diagrams This appendix contains the button diagrams for Hybrid/PBX, Key, and Behind Switch systems. SA Orig. Only Ring Ring Figure G-1. MLX-20L and MLX-28D Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode)
  • Page 940 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams Voice Ring Figure G-2. MLX-16DP Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode) Voice Ring Figure G-3. MLX 5- and 10-Button Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode)
  • Page 941 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON 5 BUTTON Orig Only Voice Ring Figure G-4. Analog Multiline Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode)
  • Page 942 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams Icom Voice Icom Ring Key Mode: Up to 8 personal line Behind Switch Mode: buttons are assigned One prime line button beginning at button 3. is assigned to button 3.
  • Page 943 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams Icom Voice Icom Ring Behind Switch Mode: One prime line is assigned to button 3. Figure G-7. MLX 5- and 10-Button Telephone (Key and Behind Switch Modes) 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON...
  • Page 944 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system More 32 SA O 33 SA V 34 SA R Figure G-9. ETR-34D Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode) These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system More 32 SA O 33 SA V...
  • Page 945 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams 32 SA O 33 SA V 34 SA R Figure G-11. ETR-6 Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode) 32 SA O 33 SA V 34 SA R Figure G-12. MLS-34D Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode)
  • Page 946 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams 32 SA O 33 SA V 34 SA R Figure G-13. MLS-18D Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode) Do not use these buttons for any facilities or features that require LEDs.
  • Page 947 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system 28 Line 5 More 29 Line 4 30 Line 3 31 Line 2 32 Line 1 25 Line 8 33 Icom V 26 Line 7 34 Icom R...
  • Page 948 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams G-10 32 Line 1 33 Icom V 30 Line 3 34 Icom R 31 Line 2 Figure G-18. ETR-6 Telephone (Key Mode) 29 Line 4 30 Line 3 31 Line 2 25 Line 8...
  • Page 949 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams G-11 30 Line 3 25 Line 8 31 Line 2 26 Line 7 32 Line 1 27 Line 6 33 Icom V 28 Line 5 34 Icom R 29 Line 4 Figure G-20.
  • Page 950 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams G-12 These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system More 32 Prime 33 Icom V 34 Icom R Figure G-23. ETR-34D Telephone (Behind Switch Mode) These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system More 32 Prime...
  • Page 951 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams G-13 32 Prime 33 Icom V 34 Icom R Figure G-25. ETR-6 Telephone (Behind Switch Mode) 32 Prime 33 Icom V 34 Icom R Figure G-26. MLS-34D Telephone (Behind Switch Mode)
  • Page 952 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Button Diagrams G-14 32 Prime 33 Icom V 34 Icom R Figure G-27. MLS-18D Telephone (Behind Switch Mode) Do not use these buttons for any facilities or features that require LEDs.

  • Page 953: Programming Special Characters

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Programming Special Characters Single-Line Telephones Programming Special Characters This appendix provides the special characters used in dialing sequences for numbers dialed automatically, such as on Auto Dial buttons. The characters allowed depend on the type of telephone.

  • Page 954: Analog Multiline Telephones

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Programming Special Characters Analog Multiline Telephones Analog Multiline Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters—for example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character after the dial-out code in a dialing sequence to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 955: And Mlx-5

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Programming Special Characters MLX-10 and MLX-5 Non-display Telephones MLX-10 and MLX-5 Non-display Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters—for example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character after the dial-out code in a dialing sequence to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 956: Mlx Display Telephones

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Programming Special Characters MLX Display Telephones MLX Display Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters—for example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character in a dialing sequence after a dial-out code to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 957: Etr And Mls Non-Display Telephones

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Programming Special Characters ETR and MLS Non-display Telephones ETR and MLS Non-display Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters—for example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character after the dial-out code in a dialing sequence to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 958: Etr And Mls Display Telephones

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Programming Special Characters ETR and MLS Display Telephones ETR and MLS Display Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters—for example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character in a dialing sequence after a dial-out code to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 959: Applications

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Applications This appendix provides an overview of the applications that you can connect to the system or that were available in the past. For complete information about the use of any application discussed here, refer to the documentation for that product.

  • Page 960: Organization Of Descriptions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Organization of Descriptions Integrated applications: — Messaging 2000 Automated Attendant Voice/Fax Mail — Intuity (see page I-31) AUDIX Voice Messaging Fax Messaging Internet Messaging Message Manager Inter Exchange Server Intuity CONVERSANT (see page...

  • Page 961: System Support For Applications

    1 (2, 4, or 6 jacks) Number of mailboxes MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Messaging 2000 Number of mailboxes 1000 Lucent Technologies Attendant CAS Plus V3/CAS for Windows Number of lines/trunks (each) Number of agents (each) Number of external alerts (each) SPM (stand-alone UNIX or DOS)

  • Page 962: Supported Printers

    Table I-2. Applications Printers Printer Document No. Description Lucent Technologies 582-421-105 9-pin dot matrix printer that provides CAS Printer choice of print quality and speed. Uses parallel connection to the computer.

  • Page 963: Passageway Direct Connection Solution

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications PassageWay Direct Connection Solution PassageWay Direct Connection Solution IMPORTANT: This section is intended solely as an overview of the application. For comprehensive information about the use of the application, see the documentation for the product.

  • Page 964: Voice Messaging Systems

    Behind Switch mode) or an SA button (in Hybrid/PBX mode). Ensuring that Automatic Line Selection is set to an ICOM or an SA button means you can make both inside and outside calls via Lucent Technologies Call. (You make outside calls on an ICOM or SA button by dialing 9.)
  • Page 965 Under applicable tariffs, you are responsible for payment of toll charges. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit resulting from unauthorized access.
  • Page 966 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Voice Messaging Systems Calling restrictions (for example, Disallowed Lists, Toll Restriction, Facility Restriction Levels) should be programmed, as appropriate, to minimize toll fraud abuse, especially if a single-line telephone is connected to an integrated VMI port.
  • Page 967 VMI port that originated the transfer. For example, you might program Extension 15 as a VMI port for a Lucent Technologies Attendant and set the transfer redirect time interval to four rings. When a call comes in on Extension 15, the caller listens to a recording and dials a request for Extension 24.

  • Page 968: Merlin Legend Mail

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Mail I-10 Every 10 minutes, the system tests each out-of-service VMI extension. If the extension responds to the test, the VMS and the calling group software mark it as in service .
  • Page 969 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Mail I-11 For example, during the day you may want to tell callers to stay on the line for assistance by an operator. At night, when there may be no operator, you may want to tell callers to stay on the line to leave a message in the Automated Attendant General Mailbox.
  • Page 970 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Mail I-12 Guest mailboxes can be created for users who do not have their own extensions, such as temporary workers, contract workers, and consultants. They can receive messages from subscribers and outside callers, even if they do not have an actual extension in the system.
  • Page 971 If Automatic Route Selection is being used, apply the appropriate Facility Restriction Levels. See the documentation that comes with the product for more details. You cannot use MERLIN LEGEND Mail VMS with Lucent Technologies Attendant. Feature Interactions Centralized Voice Centralized Voice Messaging can be used with MERLIN LEGEND Mail.
  • Page 972 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Mail I-14 Group Calling Use system programming to assign the MERLIN LEGEND Mail VMI ports to the same calling group. With integrated VMI ports, mode codes identify coverage calls that overflow from one calling group to another calling group.

  • Page 973: Messaging 2000

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Messaging 2000 I-15 Required Voice Messaging Interface (VMI) Ports The number of required VMI ports depends on the number of incoming lines/ trunks, the number of subscribers programmed for Automated Attendant service, and the number of busy-hour calls.

  • Page 974: Merlin Legend Enhanced Service Center

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Enhanced Service Center I-16 The voice and fax ports on the Messaging 2000 system connect to ports on 016 (T/R) and 012 (T/R) modules. Automated Attendant The Automated Attendant feature of Messaging 2000 allows customers to answer all calls or only those calls the live operator cannot take (such as after-hours...

  • Page 975: Call Accounting System

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Call Accounting System I-17 How the Enhanced Service Center Works When a call comes into the customer service group, the ESC answers the call. The software searches for the available agent who has been waiting the longest time and sends the call to that agent.
  • Page 976 CAS for Windows. This version takes advantage of the easy-to-use graphical user interface of Microsoft Windows. It is also a stand-alone application that runs on a Lucent Technologies-approved DOS PC. It allows a single CAS system to be used for both local and remote business sites.
  • Page 977 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Call Accounting System I-19 distinguish among the three types of calls. If this is not programmed, all three types of calls are costed and reported as ANI/ANIAB calls. Follow these steps to implement Caller ID information and CAS Plus V3 on Release 3.0 and later MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems: Program the Release 3.0 and later options, SMDR format for ISDN and...

  • Page 978: Call Accounting Terminal

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Call Accounting Terminal I-20 Feature Interactions Account Code Entry CAS uses the account codes, entered by users before or during calls, to provide reports by account code. SMDR CAS collects call information from the SMDR output of the system.
  • Page 979 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Call Accounting Terminal I-21 A variety of summary and detail reports. For example, CAT can print reports on all extensions or rooms, a single extension or room, account codes, time of day, duration, and line/trunk facility.
  • Page 980 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Call Accounting Terminal I-22 NOTE: The availability of caller identification information may be limited by local- serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or telephone company equipment. 2-line LCD display Figure I-2.

  • Page 981: Merlin Legend Reporter

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Reporter I-23 Considerations and Constraints You can connect only one CAT to the system. CAT Basic can store information about as many as 1,200 calls for 100 extensions and 49 lines.
  • Page 982 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Reporter I-24 the effectiveness of facilities and calling groups in responding to customer or client needs. It offers these broad benefits: Monitoring of Facilities Volume Usage. Traffic reports help in the analysis of peak-hour facilities usage and availability of calling group agents to respond to customer calls.
  • Page 983 You may move it to a backup storage medium and restore it when you need historic reports. Remote Access. Optionally, you can install remote access software and a modem to allow remote assistance from the Lucent Technologies customer helpline. Multi-Site Network. MERLIN LEGEND Reporter can work in a network...
  • Page 984 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Reporter I-26 System reports take precedence over the SMDR information generated for MERLIN LEGEND Reporter. In order to print system reports using the SMDR jack on the control unit, the MERLIN LEGEND Reporter serial connection to the port must be disconnected.
  • Page 985 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Reporter I-27 Conference When a conference call includes inside and outside participants, records are generated only for outside participants. When a call is dropped from a conference call, it is considered a completed call.
  • Page 986 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Reporter I-28 Park If an incoming call is parked but is not picked up by the other extension, the extension of the user who activated Park is recorded. If an incoming call is parked and picked up by the destination extension, the destination extension is recorded.

  • Page 987: System Programming And Maintenance

    GUI. WinSPM is supported in Windows 95, Windows NT, and Windows 98. SPM. This stand-alone version runs on a Lucent Technologies-approved DOS PC. Version 4.25, for Release 4.1 and later systems, runs as a DOS application under Windows 95.
  • Page 988 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications System Programming and Maintenance I-30 You can connect a PC with DOS-based SPM directly to the control unit or you can access the system remotely in one of the following ways: The system programmer dials the system directly.

  • Page 989: Intuity

    Intuity platform. For comprehensive information about the use of the applications, see the documentation for the products. Intuity is Lucent Technologies’ messaging solution. It provides a single, integrated interface to any of the following applications (your package may not include all of these): AUDIX Voice Messaging.

  • Page 990: Intuity Conversant

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Intuity CONVERSANT I-32 Intuity CONVERSANT IMPORTANT: This section is intended solely as an overview of the application. For comprehensive information about the use of the application, see the documentation for the product.

  • Page 991: Transtalk 9000 Digital Wireless System

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications TransTalk 9000 Digital Wireless System I-33 Interaction of applications with voice mailboxes, with the ability to leave and retrieve messages, execute voice mail scripts, or get subscriber information Creation of tables and retrieval and updating of data using database tables Logging and displaying error messages...

  • Page 992: Business Cordless 905 Telephone

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Business Cordless 905 Telephone I-34 Business Cordless 905 Telephone Like the TransTalk 9000 system, the Business Cordless 905 telephone is a wireless multiline telephone that connects to a radio base connected to an enhanced tip/ring port on a 412 LS-ID-ETR or 016 ETR module (Release 7.0 and later systems).
  • Page 993 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Videoconferencing I-35 Group Videoconferencing Workstations. Group videoconferencing equipment is usually more expensive than desktop equipment and provides more capabilities. Such stand-alone systems include a built-in monitor and are installed in conference rooms or on roll-about units. There are two types of group videoconferencing workstations: —...
  • Page 994 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Videoconferencing I-36 Making and receiving voice calls are not supported on telephones included with videoconferencing systems. Group Videoconferencing Group videoconferencing enables groups of people in different geographical locations to meet face to face.
  • Page 995 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Videoconferencing I-37 Mode Differences Key Mode In Key mode, a video workstation can be set up for inside video only, outside video only, or both inside and outside video. To place and receive calls in this mode, a video workstation uses personal lines or intercom lines programmed for the MLX adjunct extension.
  • Page 996 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Videoconferencing I-38 Considerations and Constraints Generally, video workstations should have exclusive use of their own lines and dedicated pools (Hybrid/PBX mode only). Because they require two lines for optimal performance, sharing lines is often not practical.
  • Page 997 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Videoconferencing I-39 Call Waiting Call waiting does not work with video calls. The call appears to wait but does not return to the extension when it becomes available. This feature should be disabled at video system extensions.
  • Page 998 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications Videoconferencing I-40 Night Service If a videoconferencing system is a member of the Night Service group, voice calls to Night Service group do not ring at these extensions. Video calls do ring, and 2B data calls can be established.

  • Page 999: Isdn Terminal Adapter

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications ISDN Terminal Adapter I-41 ISDN Terminal Adapter IMPORTANT: This section is intended solely as an overview. For comprehensive information about the use of the terminal adapter, see the documentation for the specific product.
  • Page 1000 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Applications ISDN Terminal Adapter I-42...

  • Page 1001: Glossary

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 Feature Reference 555-670-110 April 1999 Glossary GL-1 Glossary NOTE: The use of italics in this glossary denotes a cross-reference to other glossary entries or the expanded name for an acronym. Numerics 2B Data Digital information carried by two B-channels for better performance and quality;...

Table of Contents